414
Autodesk Civil 3D 2007 Subassembly Reference April 2006

C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Autodesk Civil 3D 2007

Subassembly Reference

April 2006

Page 2: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Copyright© 2006 Autodesk, Inc.All Rights ReservedThis publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANYIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESEMATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS.THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOTEXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of theproduct at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk TrademarksThe following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,3December.com, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, AEC-X, Alias, Alias (swirldesign/logo), Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, AutodeskInventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP,AutoSketch, Backdraft, Bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Can You Imagine, Character Studio,Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Civil 3D, Cleaner, Combustion, Create>what’s>Next (design/logo), DesignStudio, Design|Studio(design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), EditDV, Education by Design, FBX, Filmbox, Gmax, Heidi,HOOPS, i-drop, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, ObjectARX, Open Reality,PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, SketchBook, Visual, VisualConstruction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat,Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCADSimulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, CAiCE,Cinestream, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, DesignDoctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG Linking, DWGTrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, Gmax (logo), Gmax ready (logo), Heads-upDesign, HumanIK, Incinerator, jobnet, LocationLogic, MotionBuilder, ObjectDBX, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, RealDWG,Real-time Roto, Render Queue, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Wiretap.

Autodesk Canada Co.TrademarksThe following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Discreet,Fire, Flame, Flint, Flint RT, Frost, Glass, Inferno, MountStone, Riot, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Stream, Vapour, Wire.The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: Backburner, Multi-MasterEditing.

Third Party TrademarksAll other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program CreditsACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc.HLM is a trademark of D-Cubed Ltd. HLM © Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 1996-2004.AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2005 Vantage Software Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.Portions Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.Libpng is copyright © 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.Libtiff is Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler And Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.Active Delivery™ 2.0. © 1999-2004 Inner Media, Inc. All rights reserved.Produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide ® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright ©

Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Inkand Chemicals, Inc.International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.Macromedia ® and Flash ® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States orother countries.

Page 3: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identifiedstandards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002.Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for useonly in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied ontoanother disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnunge.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin."Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.Printed and Help produced with Idiom WorldServer™Portions Copyright © 1996-2006 Macrovision Corporation. All rights reserved.Stingray is Copyright 1995-2005, Quovadx, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Protected by copyright and licenses restricting use,copying, distribution and decompilation. The Rogue Wave name and logo and the Stingray name and logo are either registeredtrademarks or trademarks of Quovadx, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.Xerces is Copyright © 1999-2005, The Apache Software Foundation. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0; youmay not use this file except in compliance with the license. You may obtain a copy of the license at the following web address:http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numberedTKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute,to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).MrSID image compression format is Copyright © 2005, LizardTech, a division of Celartem,Inc. All rights reserved. MrSIDtechnology is protected by U.S. Patent No 5,710,835 and patents pending.Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc.The OSTN97 coordinate transformation is © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved.The OSTN02 coordinate transformation is © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved.The OSGM02 coordinate transformation is © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.Libcurl is Copyright © 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. All rights reserved.The Redland RDF Application Framework is Copyright © 2000-2005 Institute for Learning and Research Technology, Universityof Bristol. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0; you may not use this file except in compliance with the license.You may obtain a copy of the license at the following web address: http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.GDAL is Copyright © 2000, Frank Warmerdam.

GOVERNMENT USEUse, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (CommercialComputer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Page 4: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Page 5: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Contents

Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Introduction to Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3BasicBarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3BasicCurb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5BasicCurbAndGutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8BasicGuardrail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11BasicLane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12BasicLaneTransition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14BasicShoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18BasicSideSlopeCutDitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20BasicSideWalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25BridgeBoxGirder1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28BridgeBoxGirder2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38ChannelParabolicBottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43DaylightBasin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48DaylightBench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54DaylightGeneral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59DaylightMaxOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72DaylightMaxWidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77DaylightMinOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82DaylightMinWidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87DaylightMultiIntercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

v

Page 6: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DaylightStandard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97DaylightToOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108DaylightToROW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111GenericPavementStructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115LaneBrokenBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119LaneFromTaperedMedian1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124LaneFromTaperedMedian2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130LaneInsideSuper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138LaneOutsideSuper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148LaneParabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153LaneTowardCrown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163LinkMulti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165LinkOffsetAndElevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167LinkOffsetAndSlope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169LinkOffsetOnSurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174LinkSlopesBetweenPoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176LinkSlopeToElevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179LinkSlopeToSurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181LinkToMarkedPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184LinkVertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186LinkWidthAndSlope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188MarkPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191MedianDepressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193MedianDepressedShoulderExt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196MedianDepressedShoulderVert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203MedianFlushWithBarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210MedianRaisedConstantSlope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216MedianRaisedWithCrown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227OverlayCrownBetweenEdges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234OverlayMedianAsymmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239OverlayMedianSymmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246OverlayMillAndLevel1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251OverlayMillAndLevel2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259OverlayParabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278OverlayWidenWithSuper1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

vi | Contents

Page 7: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

RailSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293RetainWallTapered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297RetainWallTaperedWide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302RetainWallTieToDitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307RetainWallToLowSide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312RetainWallVertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316ShapeTrapezoidal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321ShoulderExtendAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325ShoulderExtendSubbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330ShoulderVerticalSubbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336SideDitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341SideDitchUShape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344SideDitchWithLid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348SnapToMarkedPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354StrippingPavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356StrippingTopSoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360TrenchWithPipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362TrenchPipe1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366UrbanCurbGutterGeneral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369UrbanCurbGutterValley1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373UrbanCurbGutterValley2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377UrbanCurbGutterValley3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392UrbanReplaceSidewalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397UrbanSidewalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Contents | vii

Page 8: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp
Page 9: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Subassembly Reference

In this chapterThese topics describe the construction and behavior for each

subassembly included in the Autodesk Civil 3D Corridor ■ Introduction to Subassemblies

■ BasicBarrierModeling catalogs. For more information on subassemblies,

■ BasicCurbsee Assemblies and Subassemblies in the Autodesk Civil 3D

Help.

■ BasicCurbAndGutter

■ BasicGuardrail

■ BasicLane

■ BasicLaneTransition

■ BasicShoulder

■ BasicSideSlopeCutDitch

■ BasicSideWalk

■ BridgeBoxGirder1

■ BridgeBoxGirder2

■ Channel

■ ChannelParabolicBottom

■ DaylightBasin

■ DaylightBench

■ DaylightGeneral

■ DaylightMaxOffset

■ DaylightMaxWidth

■ DaylightMinOffset

■ DaylightMinWidth

1

1

Page 10: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

■ DaylightMultiIntercept

■ DaylightStandard

■ DaylightToOffset

■ DaylightToROW

■ GenericPavementStructure

■ LaneBrokenBack

■ LaneFromTaperedMedian1

■ LaneFromTaperedMedian2

■ LaneInsideSuper

■ LaneOutsideSuper

■ LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening

■ LaneParabolic

■ LaneTowardCrown

2 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 11: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Introduction to SubassembliesAutodesk Civil 3D subassemblies are preconfigured AutoCAD drawing objectsthat let you design three-dimensional sections of roadways and othercorridor-type structures.

These Help topics describe the construction and behavior of the subassembliesincluded in the Autodesk Civil 3D Corridor Modeling catalogs. Refer to theAssemblies and Subassemblies section of the Autodesk Civil 3D Help for moreinformation on using subassemblies for corridor design.

BasicBarrierCreates a two-sided New Jersey barrier on a roadway surface.

This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the center of the bottom of the barrier.

Introduction to Subassemblies | 3

Page 12: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.15 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the top of the barrierTop Width0.5 ft

0.225 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the middle of the barrierMiddle Width0.75 ft

0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the bottom of the barrierBottom Width2.0 ft

0.9 mNumeric, positiveHeight to the top of the barrierTop Height3.0 ft

0.45 mNumeric, positiveHeight to the middle of the barrierMiddle Height1.5 ft

0.075 mNumeric, positiveHeight of the barrier curbCurb Height0.25 ft

0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth at the top of the barrier curbCurb Width1.9 ft

Output Parameters

None.

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Behavior

The subassembly constructs the shape of a two-sided New Jersey barrier, withthe base centered about the attachment point.

4 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 13: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the barrier shape as specified by theinput parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

P1, P2, ... P8P1 - P8

BarrierAll links

BarrierS1

Coding Diagram

BasicCurbCreates a a simple curb at the edge of roadway. It can be attached to eitheroutside edge of pavement or to the edge of a median on the inside.

This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

BasicCurb | 5

Page 14: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is on the front face of the curb for case 1, and on theback face of the curb for case 2.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly

Side

0.225 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width of curbWidth0.75 ft

0.45 mNumeric, posi-tive

Depth of the curbDepth1.5 ft

Front FaceBooleanSpecifies the attachment point of thecurb as either Front Face or Back Face

Attachment Point

0.3 mNumeric, posi-tive

Depth of the curb below inside attach-ment point

Depth Below1.0 ft

0.0 mNumeric, posi-tive

Exposed height of the back face of curbBack Height0.0 ft

6 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 15: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The subassembly builds a rectangular shape for a simple curb, with theattachment point at the bottom inside edge of curb.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the curb shape as specified by theinput parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Inside bottom of curbBottomCurbP1

Inside top of curbTopCurbP2

Outside top of curbBackCurbP3

CurbAll links

CurbS1

BasicCurb | 7

Page 16: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

BasicCurbAndGutterCreates a a simple curb and gutter structure at the inside or outside edges ofroadway.

This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or back of the curb.

8 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 17: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly

Side

GutterEdge

BooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb andgutter as either Gutter Edge or Back ofCurb

Insertion Point

0.45 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width from the flange of the gutter tothe flowline

Gutter Width1.5 ft

-6%Numeric% slope of the gutterGutter %Slope

0.225 mNumeric, posi-tive

Height from the flowline to the top ofcurb

Curb Height0.75 ft

0.15 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width of the top of curbCurb Width0.5 ft

0.45 mNumeric, posi-tive

Depth from the top of curb to the bot-tom of curb at the back-of-curb point

Curb Depth1.5 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) back of

BasicCurbAndGutter | 9

Page 18: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the curb and gutter shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Flange of gutterFlangeP1

Flowline of the gutterFlowline_GutterP2

Top of curbTopCurbP3

Back of curbBackCurbP4

Curb links on finish gradeTop, CurbL1, L2, L3

DatumL4

CurbS1

Coding Diagram

10 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 19: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

BasicGuardrailCreates a simple guardrail shape on the assembly.

This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the post at finish grade level.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassem-bly

Side

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

BasicGuardrail | 11

Page 20: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

The subassembly builds two rectangular shapes for the post and railing. Thedimensions are fixed, and cannot be changed by the user. The post extendsdownward from the attachment point for a fixed distance below finish grade.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the post and rail with the fixeddimensions.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

The code “Guardrail” is assigned to all points. No link or shape codes areassigned.

BasicLaneCreates a simple lane.

This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on finish grade.

12 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 21: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassem-bly

Side

3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the laneWidth12.0 ft

0.2 mNumeric, positiveDepth from finish grade to subbaseDepth0.67 ft

-2%Numeric% Slope of the lane%Slope

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Left / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

Numeric, positiveWidth of the laneWidth

Numeric, positiveDepth from finish grade to subbaseDepth

Numeric% Slope of the lane%Slope

Behavior

The subassembly builds a finish grade and subbase surface, closed by verticallinks at either end. The lane is inserted outward from the attachment pointfor the given width, depth, and slope.

BasicLane | 13

Page 22: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the lane using the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Crown of road on finish gradeCrownP1

Edge-of-traveled-way on finish gradeETWP2

Crown of road on subbaseCrown_SubbaseP3

Edge-of-traveled-way on subbaseETW_SubbaseP4

Paved finish gradeTop, PaveL1

SubbaseDatum, SubbaseL3

Pave1S1

Coding Diagram

BasicLaneTransitionCreates a simple lane with finish grade and subbase, where theedge-of-traveled-way can be tied to an alignment or profile.

This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

14 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 23: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on finish grade.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly

Side

3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of laneWidth12.0 ft

0.2 mNumeric, positiveDepth from finish grade to subbaseDepth0.67 ft

-2%Numeric% Slope of the lane%Slope

Hold offsetand eleva-tion

MenuDescribes how the subassembly be-haves when an alignment, profile, orboth are used as runtime logical as-

Transition

signments. Choices are provided ina list including:Hold offset and elevationHold elevation, change offsetHold grade, change offsetHold offset, change elevation

BasicLaneTransition | 15

Page 24: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Change offset and elevation

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Widthvalue and tie the edge-of-traveled-wayto an offset alignment.

AlignmentEdge Offset

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed slopeand tie the edge-of-traveled-way to anoffset profile.

ProfileEdge Elevation

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly provides a simple travel lane that can tie to an alignmentfor variable width, and a profile for variable slope. The behavior depends onthe Transition type selected:

DescriptionTransition Type

The width and slope of the lane is held to the Width and %Slope input parameter values.

Hold offset and elevation

The elevation of the edge-of-traveled-way is calculated fromthe Width and % slope input parameter values. The width isthen tied to the offset alignment.

Hold elevation, change offset

The width is adjusted to tie to the offset alignment. The %Slope input value is held for the adjusted width.

Hold grade, change offset

16 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 25: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionTransition Type

The width is held to the Width input parameter value. Theelevation of the edge-of-traveled-way is tied to the offsetprofile.

Hold offset, change elevation

The width is tied to the offset alignment, and the slope isadjusted to tie the elevation of the edge-of-traveled-way tothe offset profile.

Change offset and elevation

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the lane using the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Crown of road on finish gradeCrownP1

Edge-of-traveled-way on finish gradeETWP2

Crown of road on subbaseCrown_SubbaseP3

Edge-of-traveled-way on subbaseETW_SubbaseP4

Paved finish gradeTop,L1Pave

SubbaseDatum,L3Subbase

Pave1S1

BasicLaneTransition | 17

Page 26: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

BasicShoulderCreates a simple paved shoulder with finish grade and subbase.

This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the shoulder on the finish grade.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassem-bly

Side

0.9 mNumeric, positiveWidth of shoulderWidth3 ft

18 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 27: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.2 mNumeric, positiveDepth from finish grade to subbaseDepth0.67 ft

-4%Numeric% Slope of the shoulder%Slope

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The shoulder links are inserted outwards from the attachment point at thegiven width, slope, and depth.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the lane using the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Edge of paved shoulder on finishgrade

EPSP2

Edge of paved shoulder on subbaseEPS_SubP4

Paved finish gradeTop,L1Pave

SubbaseDatum, SubbaseL3

Pave1S1

BasicShoulder | 19

Page 28: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

BasicSideSlopeCutDitchUsed to close from the edge of roadway to a daylight point in both cut andfill conditions.

The cut condition includes an optional ditch. The final daylighting link canbe omitted for cases where the corridor model needs to be left in an incompletestate. For example, this might be done so that grading surfaces on adjacentproperties can tie to the hinge point on the uncompleted roadway. Thissubassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simpleroadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

20 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 29: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the ditch foreslope for cut, andat the inside edge of the daylight link for fill.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to placethe subassembly

Side

IncludeInclude / OmitIncludes or omits the Daylightlink.

Daylight Link

BasicSideSlopeCutDitch | 21

Page 30: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

2 : 1Numeric, positiveSlope of the daylight link forcut

Cut Slope

4 : 1Numeric, positiveSlope of the daylight link for fillFill Slope

4 : 1Numeric, positiveSlope of the ditch foreslope link(cut only)

Foreslope Slope

1.2 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the ditch foreslopelink (cut only)

Foreslope Width4.0 ft

0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the bottom of ditchBottom Width2.0 ft

4 : 1Numeric, positiveSlope of the ditch backslopelink (cut only)

Backslope Slope

1.2 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the ditch backslopelink (cut only)

Backslope Width4.0 ft

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional ma-terial lining along daylight

Place Lined Material

links. You can choose All Links,Daylight Links, Fill Links Only,and None.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial

Material 1 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the mate-rial applies for lining alonggarding links

Material 1 Name

22 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 31: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial

Material 2 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the mate-rial applies for lining alonggarding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial

Material 3 Thickness

Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the mate-rial applies for lining alonggarding links

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the surface for daylightingSurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The attachment point is tested to determine if it is in cut or fill. If it is in fill,the fill daylight link is extended to the Daylight Surface at the given Fill Slope.If in cut, the foreslope, ditch bottom, and backslope are added, and the cut

BasicSideSlopeCutDitch | 23

Page 32: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

daylight link is extended from the end of the backslope to the Daylight Surfaceat the given Cut Slope.

This subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specifythree ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is upto the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of materialapplied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values,then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, thenno material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws a generic cut and fill slope with arrowsat the ends.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Fill condition only - hinge point for fill daylightlink

HingeHinge_Fill

P1

Cut condition only - inside edge of ditchDitch_InP2Fill condition only - daylight pointDaylight

Daylight_Fill

Cut condition only - outside edge of ditchDitch_OutP3

Cut condition only - hinge point for cut daylightlink

Hinge_CutP4

Cut condition only - daylight pointDaylightP5Daylight_Cut

Unpaved finish gradeTopL1 - L4Datum

24 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 33: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Daylight link in fillTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

Daylight link in cutTopL4DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Coding Diagram

BasicSideWalkUsed to insert links defining a concrete sidewalk with optional boulevards.

BasicSideWalk | 25

Page 34: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

This is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadwaymodeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the inside buffer.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicateswhich side the subassemblyis inserted toward

Side

1.8 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the concrete sidewalkWidth6.0 ft

0.1 mNumeric, positiveDepth of the concrete sidewalkDepth0.333 ft

0 ft, mNumeric, positiveWidth of the inside buffer zoneBuffer Width 1

0 ft, mNumeric, positiveWidth of the outside buffer zoneBuffer Width 2

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

26 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 35: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The links for the inside buffer zone, sidewalk, and outside buffer zone areinserted outward from the attachment point at a horizontal slope. The bufferzones may be omitted by setting their widths to zero.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the buffer zone and sidewalk asspecified by the input parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Inside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_InP2

Outside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_OutP3

TopL1Datum

Sidewalk structure top linksTopL2Sidewalk

TopL3Datum

SidewalkL4 - L6Datum

Sidewalk concrete areaSidewalkS1

BasicSideWalk | 27

Page 36: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

BridgeBoxGirder1Creates a simple box girder bridge shape with optional half-barriers.

This subassembly is designed to be used for visualization, not for structuraldesign.

28 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 37: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the centerline on the bridge deck finish grade. Thebridge section is built to the left and right sides.

BridgeBoxGirder1 | 29

Page 38: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

5.34 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the left side of the bridgedeck

Left Width17.8 ft

5.34 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the right side of thebridge deck

Right Width17.8 ft

LONumeric or string% slope of the left deck surface.The slope can be a numeric value,

Left %Slope

or can use the following codes tomatch pre-defined superelevationspecifications of the baselinealignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (left)LO: outside lane slope (left)

LONumeric or string% slope of the right deck surface.The slope can be a numeric value,

Right %Slope

or can use the following codes tomatch pre-defined superelevationspecifications of the baselinealignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (right)LO: outside lane slope (right)

2.0 mNumeric, positiveVertical distance from the edge ofbridge deck to the soffit

Soffit Depth6.67 ft

0.150 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the bridge deck atthe edge

Edge Depth0.5 ft

30 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 39: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.300 mNumeric, positiveVertical distance from the edge ofbridge deck to the root of theflange

Flange Depth1.0 ft

1.2 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the overhangOverhang Width4.0 ft

2.0 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the girderGirder Width6.67 ft

IncludeInclude / OmitIncludes or omits barriers to eachside of the bridge deck.

Include BarriersOmit Barriers

810 mmNumeric, positiveHeight of the barrier at the centerof median

Barrier A (mm or inches)32 in

131 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier B (mm or inches)4.5 in

59 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier C (mm or inches)2 in

125 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier D (mm or inches)5 in

557 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier E (mm or inches)22 in

178 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier F (mm or inches)7 in

BridgeBoxGirder1 | 31

Page 40: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedLeft Width value and tie the leftedge-of-deck to an offset alignment.

AlignmentLeft Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedRight Width value and tie the rightedge-of-deck to an offset alignment.

AlignmentRight Width

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The subassembly builds the links for the bridge deck and under-structure basedon the input parameter values given. In superelevation, not all of the structureis rotated. The Soffit Depth is held to thegiven value from the top-edge-of-deckon the low side of the bridge, and the height of the girder is adjusted on thehigh side to the root of the deck.

If Include Barriers is True, New Jersey barrier sections are added at the left andright edges-of-deck. The slopes of the barrier bottoms adjust to match the deckslopes.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the bridge structure and barriers asspecified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Edge of bridge deckEBDP1, P3

Crown point on bridge deckCrown_DeckP2

32 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 41: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape

Deck, TopL1, L2

Bridge substructure linksBridgeL3 – L9

BarrierAll barrier links

BridgeS1

BarrierS2, S3

Coding Diagram

BridgeBoxGirder2Creates a two-chamber box girder bridge shape with optional half-barriers.

This subassembly is designed to be used for visualization, not for structuraldesign.

BridgeBoxGirder2 | 33

Page 42: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the dividing line between the left and right lanes,on the bridge deck finish grade. The bridge section is built to the left and rightsides.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

5.34 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width of the left lanes of thebridge deck

Left Lane Width17.8 ft

34 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 43: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

5.34 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width of the right lanes of thebridge deck

Right Lane Width17.8 ft

LONumeric orstring

% slope of the bridge deck fromthe left edge to the right edge. The

Deck %Slope

slope is constant across the entirewidth of the deck.Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (left)LO: outside lane slope (left)

IncludeInclude / OmitIncludes or omits barriers to eachside of the bridge deck.

Include BarriersOmit Barriers

0.200 mNumeric, posi-tive

Deck thickness at the edgeDimension A0.667 ft

0.300 mNumeric, posi-tive

Deck thickness at the flangeDimension B1.0 ft

1.8 mNumeric, posi-tive

Total depth from finish grade tobottom of soffit

Dimension C6.0 ft

0.150 mNumeric, posi-tive

Step widthDimension D0.5 ft

1.425 mNumeric, posi-tive

Total flange widthDimension E4.75 ft

0.170 mNumeric, posi-tive

Bottom girder thicknessDimension F0.5625 ft

0.250 mNumeric, posi-tive

Center girder thicknessDimension G0.833 ft

0.210 mNumeric, posi-tive

Top girder thicknessDimension H0.7 ft

BridgeBoxGirder2 | 35

Page 44: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.300 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width of the top corner of the in-side girder

Dimension I1.0 ft

0.600 mNumeric, posi-tive

Step heightDimension J2.0 ft

810 mmNumeric, posi-tive

Height of the barrier at the centerof median

Barrier A (mm or inches)32 in

131 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramBarrier B (mm or inches)4.5 in

59 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramBarrier C (mm or inches)2 in

125 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramBarrier D (mm or inches)5 in

557 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramBarrier E (mm or inches)22 in

178 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramBarrier F (mm or inches)7 in

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed LeftWidth and tie the left edge-of-deck to anoffset alignment.

AlignmentLeft Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed RightWidth and tie the right edge-of-deck to

AlignmentRight Width

an offset alignment at each station alongthe corridor.

36 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 45: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The subassembly builds the links for the bridge deck and under-structure basedon the input parameter values given. If the LI or LO options are used for thebridge deck, the superelevation slope for the left side is held constant acrossthe entire width of the bridge.

If Include Barriers is True, one-sided New Jersey barrier sections are added atthe left and right edges-of-deck. The slopes of the barrier bottoms adjust tomatch the deck slopes.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the bridge structure and barriers asspecified by the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Edge of bridge deckEBDP1, P3

Crown point on bridge deckCrown_DeckP2

Deck, TopL1

All exterior bridge substructure linksBridge

All interior bridge substructure linksGirder

BarrierAll barrier links

BridgeS1

BarrierS2, S3

BridgeBoxGirder2 | 37

Page 46: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

ChannelThis subassembly creates an open channel with optional lining and backslopelinks.

38 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 47: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is located above the midpoint of the bottom width, ata height equal to the Depth parameter.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

2.0 mNumeric, PositiveThe vertical offset down from the profilegrade line elevation to the bottom of thechannel.

Depth6.0 ft

2.0 mNumeric, PositiveWidth of bottom of the channel.Bottom Width6.0 ft

1 (:1)NumericChannel sideslopesSideslope

0.1mNumeric, PositiveDepth of channel liningLining Depth0.33ft

StringOptional marked point on the outermostchannel point on the left side; If no code

Left Marked Point

is entered then marked point is not insert-ed.

StringOptional marked point on the outermostchannel point on he right side; If no code

Right MarkedPoint

is entered then marked point is not insert-ed.

0.5mNumeric, PositiveExtension of channel left side over the inser-tion point

Left ExtensionHeight 1.67ft

1.5 mNumeric, PositiveChannel backfill width on left sideLeft BackslopeWidth 5.0 ft

Channel | 39

Page 48: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

4 (:1)NumericChannel backfill slope on left sideLeft Backslope

0.5 mNumeric, PositiveExtension of channel right side over theinsertion point

Right ExtensionHeight 1.67 ft

1.5 mNumeric, PositiveChannel backfill width on he right sideRight BackslopeWidth 5.0 ft

4 (:1)NumericChannel backfill slope on right sideRight Backslope

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed ex-tension height on left side and tie to aprofile.

ProfileLeft Extension Height

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed LeftBackslope Width and tie to an offsetalignment.

AlignmentLeft Backslope Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed LeftBackslope and tie to a profile.

ProfileLeft Backslope Eleva-tion

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed ex-tension height on right side and tie toa profile.

ProfileRight ExtensionHeight

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed RightBackslope Width and tie to an offsetalignment.

AlignmentLeft Backslope Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed RightBackslope and tie to a profile.

ProfileLeft Backslope Eleva-tion

40 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 49: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly builds an open channel shape using the input parameters.The attachment point is typically at the start of the baseline, at associatedalignments and profiles. The bottom link of the channel is then drawn usinga specified width. Using the sideslope parameter, the channel sides are drawnon either sides.

For the channel lining depth, if a non-zero positive value is specified, then amaterial lining is drawn around the channel, with horizontal (or vertical atthe bottom) offset of the lining equal to that parameter. If a zero value isspecified for the lining, then no links are inserted.

Similarly, if a zero value is specified for left or right extensions and backslopewidths, those links are omitted, or are not drawn. Extension height can becontrolled with a runtime logical assignment profile association. Similarly,the height of the backslope end point can be specified to a profile. To forcethe outer backslope point to the channel top elevation, associate this pointto the channel’s finish grade profile, to which this assembly is attached.

If the Backslope Width is omitted, the Right Marked Point is located on theouter point of channel height extension. If the Channel Height Extensionlink is also omitted, then the marked point is located on the outermost pointon the channel top.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Middle point of the channel bottomChannel_FlowlineP1

Channel_BottomP2,P3

Channel_TopP4, P5

Channel | 41

Page 50: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Channel_ExtensionP6,P7

Channel_BackslopeP8,P9

P13

Datum, Channel_Bottom and Top (iflining is NOT used)

L1, L2, L3

Datum, TopL4 to L7

Channel_Bottom and TOP (if lining ISused)

L8 to L12

Channel Lining MaterialLining_MaterialS1

Coding Diagram

42 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 51: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

ChannelParabolicBottomThis subassembly creates an open channel with a parabolic bottom, withoptional lining and backslope links.

Attachment

The attachment point is located above the midpoint of the bottom width, ata height equal to the Depth parameter.

ChannelParabolicBottom | 43

Page 52: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

2.0 mNumeric, PositiveThe vertical offset down from theprofile grade line elevation to thebottom of the channel.

Depth6.0 ft

2.0 mNumeric, PositiveWidth of bottom of the channel.Bottom Width6.0 ft

7Integer, PositiveNumber of tesselation points onparabolic curve

Curve TesselationPoints

1 (:1)NumericChannel sideslopesSideslope

0.1 mNumeric, PositiveDepth of channel liningLining Depth0.33 ft

StringOptional marked point on the outer-most channel point on the left side;

Left Marked Point

If no code is entered then markedpoint is not inserted.

StringOptional marked point on the outer-most channel point on he right side;

Right Marked Point

If no code is entered then markedpoint is not inserted.

0.5 mNumeric, PositiveExtension of channel left side overthe insertion point

Left Extension Height1.67 ft

1.5 mNumeric, PositiveChannel backfill width on left sideLeft Backslope Width5.0 ft

4 (:1)NumericChannel backfill slope on left sideLeft Backslope

44 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 53: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.5 mNumeric, PositiveExtension of channel right side overthe insertion point

Right Extension Height1.67 ft

1.5 mNumeric, PositiveChannel backfill width on he rightside

Right Backslope Width5.0 ft

4 (:1)NumericChannel backfill slope on right sideRight Backslope

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedextension height on left side andtie to a profile.

ProfileLeft Extension Height

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedLeft Backslope Width and tie to anoffset alignment.

Align-ment

Left Backslope Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedLeft Backslope and tie to a profile.

ProfileLeft Backslope Elevation

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedextension height on right side andtie to a profile.

ProfileRight Extension Height

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedRight Backslope Width and tie toan offset alignment.

Align-ment

Left Backslope Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedRight Backslope and tie to a profile.

ProfileLeft Backslope Elevation

Output Parameters

None.

ChannelParabolicBottom | 45

Page 54: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

This subassembly builds an open channel shape using the input parameters.The attachment point is typically at the start of the baseline, at associatedalignments and profiles. At the bottom left and right lower sideslope link,points are located using a specified Bottom Width parameter. A paraboliccurve is drawn between these two points with grade-in and grade-out equalto the specified sideslope parameter. The length of the parabolic curve is equalto the Bottom Width value. This parabolic curve is drawn in tessellated linksusing the Curve Tessellation Points parameter. If the tessellation index is odd,then a point is added directly below the attachment point of the subassembly.

For the channel lining depth, if a non-zero positive value is specified, then amaterial lining is drawn around the channel with a horizontal (or vertical atthe bottom) offset of the lining equal to that parameter. If a zero value isspecified for the lining, then no links are inserted.

Similarly, if a zero value is specified for left or right extensions and backslopewidths, those links are omitted or are not drawn. Extension height can becontrolled with a profile runtime logical assignment association. Similarly,the height of the outermost backslope point can be specified with a profileruntime logical assignment. To force the outermost backslope point to thechannel top height, associate this to the channel’s finish grade profile, ttowhich this assembly is attached.

If the Backslope Width is omitted, then the marked point is located on theouter point of the channel height extension. If the Channel Height Extentionlink is also omitted, then the marked point is located on the outermost pointof the channel top.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Middle point of the channel bottomChannel_FlowlineP1

Channel_BottomP2,P3

46 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 55: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Channel_TopP4, P5

Channel_ExtensionP6,P7

Channel_BackslopeP8,P9

P13

Datum, Channel_Bottom andTop (if lining is NOT used)

L1, L2, L3

Datum, TopL4 to L7

Channel_Bottom and TOP (iflining IS used)

L8 to L12

Channel Lining MaterialLining_MaterialS1

Coding Diagram

ChannelParabolicBottom | 47

Page 56: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DaylightBasinInserts links to create a basin and cut daylight slope for a cut condition, or abasin, berm, and fill slope for a fill condition.

The final daylighting link can be omitted in cases where the corridor modelneeds to be left in an incomplete state. For example, this might be done sothat grading surfaces on adjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on theuncompleted roadway.

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

48 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 57: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the basin foreslope. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly

Side

IncludeInclude / OmitIncludes or omits the Daylight link.Daylight Link

OmitInclude / OmitIncludes or omits the Daylight link.Include Daylight LinkOmit Daylight Link

DaylightBasin | 49

Page 58: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

3 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for the basin foreslope linkForeSlope Slope

1.2 mNumeric, positiveThe width of the foreslopeForeSlope Width4.0 ft

0.0Numeric, positiveThe depth of the bottom of thebasin from the bottom of the fores-lope link

Basin Depth

1.8 mNumeric, positiveThe slope of the sides of the basinBasin Slope6.0 ft

1.8 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the basinBasin Width6.0 ft

1.8 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the berm used in fill condi-tions

Berm Width6.0 ft

3 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope of the daylight link in cutconditions

Cut Slope

3 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope of the daylight link in fillconditions

Fill Slope

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional materiallining along daylight links. You can

Place Lined Material

choose All Links, Daylight Links, FillLinks Only, and None.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial

Material 1 Thickness

50 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 59: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial

Material 2 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial

Material 3 Thickness

SeededGrass

StringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedBasin Depth and tie the elevation ofthe basin to a profile.

ProfileBasin Elevation

RequiredName of the daylighting surface.SurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

None.

DaylightBasin | 51

Page 60: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

The subassembly builds the links for the basin foreslope and basin out to thebasin test point. If a profile is given, the width of the foreslope varies to holdto the basin profile, while the basin depth is held constant. If the basin testpoint is in cut, the daylight intercept is calculated on the target surface at thegiven Cut Slope. If it is in fill, a top-of-berm link is added, and the daylightintercept is calculated on the target surface at the given Fill Slope. The daylightlink is not inserted if Omit Daylight Link is set to True. If the top-of-berm linkintersects the target surface, the section is terminated at the intersection.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the foreslope, basin sideslopes, andbasin bottom with the given input parameter values. Both the cut and fillcondition links are shown in dashed lines, with the daylight links extendedoutward for a width of 3 meters or 10 feet at the given slopes. The daylightlinks terminate in arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Inside bottom of basinDitch_InP3

Outside bottom of basinDitch_OutP4

Hinge point for the cut conditionHingeP5Hinge_Cut

Hinge point for the fill conditionHingeP6

52 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 61: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge_Fill

Daylight point, and daylight point foreither the cut or fill condition

DaylightDaylight_Cut or

P7

Daylight_Fill

TopAll linksDatum

Daylight link for cut sectionTopL6DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopL6DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

Coding Diagram

DaylightBasin | 53

Page 62: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DaylightBenchInserts links to create cut or fill catch slopes with repeating benches as needed.

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the initial cut or fill slope. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.

54 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 63: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly

Side

2 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for the cut daylight slopeCut Slope

3.0 mNumericThe maximum allowable height forthe cut daylight link without bench-ing

Max Cut Height10.0 ft

2 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for the fill daylight slopeFill Slope

3.0 mNumeric, positiveThe maximum allowable height forthe fill daylight link without benching

Max Fill Height10.0 ft

1.5 mNumeric, positiveThe width of the benchBench Width5.0 ft

2 (%)NumericThe +/- % slope of the bench. Positiveslopes are upward in the direction ofincreasing offset

Bench % Slope

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional materiallining along daylight links. You can

Place Lined Material

choose All Links, Daylight Links, FillLinks Only, and None.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial

Material 1 Thickness

DaylightBench | 55

Page 64: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial

Material 2 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial

Material 3 Thickness

SeededGrass

StringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation

56 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 65: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

The initial hinge point is set at the attachment point. The hinge point elevationis checked against the target surface to determine if the section is in the cutor fill condition. An intercept is calculated to the target surface using the givenCut Slope or Fill Slope. If the height to the intercept exceeds the Max Height,the link with the Max Height is inserted, and the bench link is added. Thehinge point is reset to the outside edge of the bench and the process is repeateduntil a daylight link is found that does not exceed the Max Height.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws the initial cut and fill slopes to theirmaximum heights, a single bench, followed by cut and fill daylight slopes forhalf the maximum heights. The daylight links terminate with an arrowheadpointing outwards.

DaylightBench | 57

Page 66: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge point, either for the cut or fill condition. Thisonly applies to the inside edge of the actual day-lighting link.

HingeHinge_Cut orHinge_Fill

P1

Daylight point, and daylight point for either thecut or fill condition. This only applies to the actualdaylight point.

DaylightDaylight_Cut orDaylight_Fill

P2

The inside edge of the bench(es)Bench_InP2

The outside edge of the bench(es)Bench_OutP3

TopAll linksDatum

Daylight link for cut sectionTopFinal daylight linkDatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopFinal daylight linkDatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

58 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 67: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

DaylightGeneralThis subassembly is a generalized solution to closing the sections from theoutside edge of roadway to cut or fill intercept point.

It provides a variety of solutions for cut and fill conditions, as described below.Based on the input parameters provided, it first attempts to build a cut section.If unable to do this it builds a fill section instead. The final daylighting linkcan be omitted for cases where the corridor model needs to be left in anincomplete state. For example, this might be done so that grading surfaces onadjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on the uncompleted roadway.

DaylightGeneral | 59

Page 68: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

60 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 69: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

The DaylightGeneral subassembly is typically attached to the subassemblyused at the outside edge of the roadway, such as the edge of shoulder, backof sidewalk, or back of curb. The attachment point is at the inside edge of thefirst Cut link, first Fill link, or Guardrail widening link.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to placethe subassembly

Side

DaylightGeneral | 61

Page 70: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

FalseTrue / FalseIncludes or omits the Daylightlink.

Omit Daylight Link

3Numeric, positive, inte-ger

Number of the Cut Link whoseoutside end is the test point

Cut Test Point

for determining if the sectionis in cut or fill

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 1Cut 1 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 1Cut 1 Slope

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 2Cut 2 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 2Cut 2 Slope

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 3Cut 3 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 3Cut 3 Slope

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 4Cut 4 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 4Cut 4 Slope

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 5Cut 5 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 5Cut 5 Slope

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 6Cut 6 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 6Cut 6 Slope

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 7Cut 7 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 7Cut 7 Slope

62 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 71: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 8Cut 8 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 8Cut 8 Slope

6 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveFirst, flattest, catch slope toattempt.

Flat Cut Slope

1.5 mNumeric, positiveMaximum allowable height ofthe closing link using the FlatCut Slope

Flat Cut Max Height5 ft

4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveCut slope to attempt if the FlatCut Slope link exceeds the FlatCut Max Height

Medium Cut Slope

3 mNumeric, positiveMaximum allowable height ofthe closing link using theMedium Cut Slope.

Medium Cut Max Height10 ft

2 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveCut slope to use if the MediumCut Slope link exceeds theMedium Cut Max Height.

Steep Cut Slope

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Fill 1Fill 1 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Fill 1Fill 1 Slope

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Fill 2Fill 2 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Fill 2Fill 2 Slope

0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Fill 3Fill 3 Width

0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Fill 3Fill 3 Slope

DaylightGeneral | 63

Page 72: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

6 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveFirst, flattest, catch slope toattempt. (x : 1)

Flat Fill Slope

1.5 mNumeric, positiveMaximum allowable height ofthe closing link using the FlatFill Slope

Flat Fill Max Height5 ft

4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveFill slope to attempt if the FlatFill Slope link exceeds the FlatFill Max Height

Medium Fill Slope

3 mNumeric, positiveMaximum allowable height ofthe closing link using theMedium Fill Slope

Medium Fill Max Height10 ft

2 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveFill slope to use if the MediumFill Slope link exceeds theMedium Fill Max Height

Steep Fill Slope

0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the guardrail widen-ing link for fill slopes using

Guardrail Width2 ft

Steep Fill Slope. Use zero forno guardrail widening.

-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the guardrailwidening link

Guardrail %Slope

OmitInclude / OmitInclude to insert links for theguardrail structure on the

Include GuardrailOmit Guardrail

guardrail widening segment.Omit does not insert theguardrail structure.

0.3 mNumericWhen the guardrail is included,the width from the attachment

Width to Post1 ft

point to the inside edge of theguardrail post.

64 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 73: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional ma-terial lining along daylight

Place Lined Material

links. You can choose All Links,Daylight Links, Fill Links Only,and None.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial

Material 1 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the ma-terial applies for lining alonggarding links

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial

Material 2 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the ma-terial applies for lining alonggarding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial

Material 3 Thickness

DaylightGeneral | 65

Page 74: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the ma-terial applies for lining alonggarding links

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation

Behavior

This subassembly is designed to accommodate a wide variety of clear zone,cut section, and fill section configurations. It allows up to eight links to beused in cut sections from the edge-of-roadway to the cut intercept hinge point,and any one of these links can be used as the cut test point. Up to three filllinks can be used out to the fill hinge point, and provides special guardrailshoulder widening for steep fill conditions.

Cut links are denoted as Cut 1, Cut 2, up to Cut 8. The Cut Test Point inputvalue indicates which cut link ends at the cut test point. The logical steps usedare as follows:

1 The cut surface links are constructed temporarily from Cut 1 to the cutlink ending at the test point.

2 If the test point, or any portion of the temporary surface, is below thetarget surface, the section is completed as a cut section. If the entire setof temporary links is above the target surface the section is completed asa fill section.

66 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 75: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

The cut example in the subassembly diagram show where five Cut links aredefined. The cut test point is on the third link. The fill example shows twodefined Fill links.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Cut Section:

1 If the cut test point is above the target surface, the links are tracedbackwards from the test point until an intersection with the target surfaceis found. The section is terminated at this point.

2 If the test point is below the target surface, the remaining cut links areadded one by one. Each one is tested to see if it intersects the daylightsurface. If so, the cut section terminates at the intersection point and theappropriate Hinge and Daylight codes are assigned.

3 To close to the target surface in cut:

■ If Include Daylight Link is set to False, no cut daylight intercept iscalculated.

■ The intercept to the daylight surface is calculated using the Flat CutSlope value.

■ If the height of the flat cut slope exceeds the Flat Cut Max Height,the intercept to the daylight surface is re-calculated using the MediumCut Slope value.

■ If the height of the medium cut slope exceeds the Medium Cut MaxHeight, the intercept to the daylight surface is re-calculated using theSteep Cut Slope value.

DaylightGeneral | 67

Page 76: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Fill Section

1 Fill links are inserted outward from the attachment point to the fill hingepoint, which is the outer edge of the last non-zero fill link.

2 When a fill link intersects the daylight surface before reaching the hingepoint, the section is terminated at the intersection and the appropriateHinge and Daylight point codes are assigned.

3 To close to the target surface in fill:

■ The intercept to the target surface is calculated using the Flat Fill Slopevalue. If the height of the intercept link does not exceed the Flat FillMax Height, this slope is used to add the link to the assembly,otherwise:

■ The intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the MediumFill Slope value. If the height of the intercept link does not exceed theMedium Fill Max Height, this slope is used to add the link to theassembly, otherwise:

■ If a non-zero guardrail width is given, the links (Fill 1, Fill 2 etc.) areremoved. The guardrail widening link is added at the attachmentpoint using the Guardrail Width and Guardrail %Slope parameters.The intercept to the target surface is re-calculated from the outsideedge of the guardrail widening link using the Steep Fill Slope value,and the link is added to the assembly.

■ If the guardrail width is zero, the steep fill slope is applied from thefill hinge point.

A guardrail structure may be applied to fill sections that meet the criteria forusing the steep fill slope. If this criteria is met, the Guardrail Width is not zero,and Include Guardrail is set to true, then a guardrail structure is drawn at thestation. The dimensions of the guardrail structure are fixed as shown in thediagram below.

68 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 77: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly shows both the cut and fill conditionflat-slope solutions in dashed lines. The daylight link is extended outward fora horizontal distance of 3 meters or 10 feet, and terminates with an arrowhead.

DaylightGeneral | 69

Page 78: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Ditch test point at the end of Cut Link n,where n is the cut test point link number

Ditch_OutCP(n+1)

Hinge point for the cut intercept slopeHingeCP (1 to n)Hinge_Cut

Cut slopestake pointDaylightCP10Daylight_Cut

Hinge point for the fill intercept slopeHingeFP (1 to n)Hinge_Fill

Fill slopestake pointDaylightFP5Daylight_Fill

All cut, fill, and guardrail linksTopAll linksDatum

No codes are assigned to the points on theguardrail structure, if included.

NoneGuardrail points

All links comprising the guardrail structure,if included.

GuardrailGuardrail links

Daylight link for cut sectionTopFinal daylight linkDatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopFinal daylight linkDatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

70 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 79: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

DaylightGeneral | 71

Page 80: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DaylightMaxOffsetInserts a link that extends to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope.

If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point within a maximum+/- offset from the baseline.

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.

72 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 81: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly

Side

4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting incut conditions

Cut Slope

4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting infill conditions

Fill Slope

3.0 mNumericThe maximum allowable offset forthe daylight point

Max Offset from Base-line 10.0 ft

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional materiallining along daylight links. You can

Place Lined Material

choose All Links, Daylight Links, FillLinks Only, and None.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined ma-terial

Material 1 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced

Slope Limit 2

DaylightMaxOffset | 73

Page 82: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined ma-terial

Material 2 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined ma-terial

Material 3 Thickness

Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to overridethe fixed Max Offset value

AlignmentMax Offset

and tie the maximum offsetto an offset alignment.

RequiredName of the daylightingsurface.

SurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight point.Daylight Offset

NumericElevation of the daylight point.Daylight Elevation

74 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 83: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition.If a daylight point is found, its offset is compared to the Max Offset value. Ifthe Max Offset value is exceeded, the daylight point is moved to the maximumoffset point on the target surface. If no cut daylight point is found, the processis repeated for the fill condition.

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Max Offset duringcorridor modeling, the value of the Max Offset will vary to match the offsetof the alignment.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashedlines extended outward for a distance of 3 meters or 10 feet. The daylight linksare terminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.

DaylightMaxOffset | 75

Page 84: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge point, and hinge point for the cutor fill condition

HingeHinge_Cut or

P1

Hinge_Fill

Daylight point, and daylight point for thecut or fill condition

DaylightDaylight_Cut or

P2

Daylight_Fill

TopL1Datum

Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

76 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 85: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

DaylightMaxWidthInserts a link that daylights to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope.

If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point within a maximumwidth from the hinge point.

DaylightMaxWidth | 77

Page 86: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly

Side

4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting in cutconditions

Cut Slope

78 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 87: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting in fillconditions

Fill Slope

3.0 mNumericThe maximum allowable width fromthe hinge point (attachment point) forthe daylight point

Max Width10.0 ft

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material lin-ing along daylight links. You can choose

Place Lined Material

All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only,and None.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thickness

Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links

Material 3 Name

DaylightMaxWidth | 79

Page 88: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed MaxWidth value and tie the maximumwidth to an offset alignment

AlignmentMax Width

RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation

Behavior

This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition.If a daylight point is found, the width of the daylight link is compared to theMax Width value. If the Max Width value is exceeded, the daylight point ismoved to the maximum width point on the target surface. If no cut daylightpoint is found, the process is repeated for the fill condition.

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Max Width duringcorridor modeling, the value of the Max Width will vary to match the offsetof the alignment.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

80 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 89: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashedlines extended outward for a distance of 3 meters or 10 feet. The daylight linksare terminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge point, and hinge point for the cut or fillcondition

HingeHinge_Cut or

P1

Hinge_Fill

Daylight point, and daylight point for the cutor fill condition

DaylightDaylight_Cut or

P2

Daylight_Fill

TopL1Datum

Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

DaylightMaxWidth | 81

Page 90: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

DaylightMinOffsetInserts a link that daylights to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope.

If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point beyond aminimum offset from the baseline.

82 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 91: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly

Side

DaylightMinOffset | 83

Page 92: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting in cutconditions

Cut Slope

4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting in fillconditions

Fill Slope

3.0 mNumericThe minimum allowable offset for thedaylight point

Min Offset fromBaseline 10.0 ft

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material liningalong daylight links. You can choose All

Place Lined Materi-al

Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, andNone.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thick-ness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thick-ness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thick-ness

84 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 93: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Min Offsetand tie the minimum offset to an offset align-ment

AlignmentMin Offset

RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation

Behavior

This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition.If a daylight point is found, its offset is compared to the Min Offset value. Ifthe daylight point is within the Min Offset, the daylight point is moved tothe minimum offset point on the target surface. If no cut daylight point isfound, the process is repeated for the fill condition.

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Min Offset duringcorridor modeling, the value of the Min Offset will vary to match the offsetof the alignment.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of

DaylightMinOffset | 85

Page 94: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashedlines extended outward for the Min Offset distance. The daylight links areterminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge point, either for the cut or fill condi-tion

HingeHinge_Cut or

P1

Hinge_Fill

Daylight point, and daylight point for eitherthe cut or fill condition

DaylightDaylight_Cut or

P2

Daylight_Fill

TopL1Datum

Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1

86 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 95: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

Coding Diagram

DaylightMinWidthInserts a link that daylights to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope.

If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point beyond aminimum width from the hinge point.

DaylightMinWidth | 87

Page 96: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

88 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 97: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

The slope for normal daylighting in cut con-ditions

Cut Slope

4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

The slope for normal daylighting in fill condi-tions

Fill Slope

3.0 mNumericThe minimum allowable offset for the day-light point

Min Width10.0 ft

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material liningalong daylight links. You can choose All Links,Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None.

Place Lined Materi-al

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the asso-ciated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thick-ness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material applies forlining along garding links

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the asso-ciated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thick-ness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material applies forlining along garding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the asso-ciated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thick-ness

DaylightMinWidth | 89

Page 98: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the material applies forlining along garding links

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Min Width andtie the minimum width to an offset alignment

AlignmentMin Width

RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation

Behavior

This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition.If a daylight point is found, the width of the daylight link is compared to theMin Width value. If the daylight point is within the Min Width, the daylightpoint is moved to the minimum width point on the target surface. If no cutdaylight point is found, the process is repeated for the fill condition.

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Min Width duringcorridor modeling, the value of the Min Width will vary to match the offsetof the alignment.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

90 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 99: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashedlines extended outward for the Min Width distance. The daylight links areterminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge point, either for the cut or fill conditionHingeP1Hinge_Cut orHinge_Fill

Daylight point, and daylight point for eitherthe cut or fill condition

DaylightDaylight_Cut or

P2

Daylight_Fill

TopL1Datum

DaylightMinWidth | 91

Page 100: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

Coding Diagram

DaylightMultiInterceptThis subassembly is used when a cut or fill daylight slope may have more thanone intersection with the target surface.

An input parameter controls which intercept is used.

92 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 101: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

The slope for normal daylighting in cut conditionsCut Slope

4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

The slope for normal daylighting in fill conditionsFill Slope

DaylightMultiIntercept | 93

Page 102: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

10Numeric, posi-tive, integer

The number of the intercept to save. If the Inter-cept Number value is greater than the actual

Intercept Num-ber

number of intercepts, the highest intercept foundis used

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material lining alongdaylight links. You can choose All Links, DaylightLinks, Fill Links Only, and None.

Place Lined Ma-terial

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the associatedmaterial lining is placed

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material applies for lin-ing along garding links

Material 1Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the associatedmaterial lining is placed

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material applies for lin-ing along garding links

Material 2Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the associatedmaterial lining is placed

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3Thickness

SeededGrass

StringSpecifies the name of the material applies for lin-ing along garding links

Material 3Name

94 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 103: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation

Behavior

This subassembly attempts to find all possible daylight points for the cut slopecondition. If one or more daylight points are found, they are ordered andnumbered by increasing offset from the hinge point. The daylight link isterminated at the point that matches the Intercept Number value. If theintercept number is higher than the number of intercepts found, the lastintercept is used.

If no daylight points are found for the cut condition, the process is repeatedfor the fill condition.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

DaylightMultiIntercept | 95

Page 104: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill solutions indashed lines extended outward for a distance of 3 meters or 10 feet. Thedaylight links terminate in arrowheads pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge point, either for the cut or fill conditionHingeP1Hinge_Cut orHinge_Fill

Daylight point, and daylight point for either thecut or fill condition

DaylightDaylight_Cut or

P2

Daylight_Fill

Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

96 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 105: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

DaylightStandardThis subassembly creates corridor-side daylighting links with user-definedslope configurations, such as flat, medium, and maximum slopes for cut andfill situations.

This subassembly creates either a v-shaped or flat- bottom ditch in cutsituations, and includes an option to include guard rail widening for steep fillconditions.

The final daylighting link can be omitted for cases where the corridor modelneeds to be left in an incomplete state. For example, this might be done sothat grading surfaces on adjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on theuncompleted roadway.

DaylightStandard | 97

Page 106: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

98 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 107: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

This subassembly is typically attached to the subassembly used at the outsideedge of the roadway, such as the edge of shoulder, back of sidewalk, or backof curb. The attachment point is at the inside edge of the ditch front link, thetop of the flat or medium fill slope, or inside edge of guardrail widening link,depending on conditions.

DaylightStandard | 99

Page 108: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly

Side

IncludeInclude / OmitInclude or omit the Daylight link.Include Daylight LinkOmit Daylight Link

6 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

First, flattest, catch slope to at-tempt. (x : 1)

Flat Cut Slope

1.5 mNumericMaximum allowable height of theclosing link using the Flat CutSlope

Flat Cut Max Height5 ft

4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

Cut slope to attempt if the FlatCut Slope link exceeds the FlatCut Max Height

Medium Cut Slope

3 mNumericMaximum allowable height of theclosing link using the MediumCut Slope

Medium Cut Max Height10 ft

2 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

Cut slope to use if the MediumCut Slope link exceeds the Medi-um Cut Max Height

Steep Cut Slope

3.6 mNumericFor cut sections, the width of thefront-of-ditch link

Foreslope Width12 ft

4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

Slope of the front-of-ditch link (x: 1). This link is always inserteddownwards.

Foreslope Slope

100 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 109: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

1 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width of the bottom of ditch. Usezero for a V-ditch.

Ditch Width3 ft

6 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

First, flattest, catch slope to at-tempt. (x : 1)

Flat Fill Slope

1.5 mNumericMaximum allowable height of theclosing link using the Flat FillSlope

Flat Fill Max Height5 ft

4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

Fill slope to attempt if the Flat FillSlope link exceeds the Flat FillMax Height

Medium Fill Slope

3 mNumericMaximum allowable height of theclosing link using the Medium FillSlope

Medium Fill Max Height10 ft

2 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive

Fill slope to use if the Medium FillSlope link exceeds the MediumFill Max Height

Steep Fill Slope

0.6 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width of the guardrail wideninglink for fill slopes using Steep Fill

Guardrail Width2 ft

Slope. Use zero for no guardrailwidening.

-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the guardrail wideninglink

Guardrail %Slope

OmitInclude / OmitInclude to insert the guardrailstructure when guardrail widen-

Include GuardrailOmit Guardrail

ing occurs. Omit does not insertthe guardrail structure.

0.3 mNumericWhen the guardrail is included,the width from the attachment

Width to Post1 ft

DaylightStandard | 101

Page 110: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

point to the inside edge of theguardrail post.

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional materi-al lining along daylight links. You

Place Lined Material

can choose All Links, DaylightLinks, Fill Links Only, and None.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated material lin-ing is placed

Slope Limit 1

12 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of linedmaterial

Material 1 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along gardinglinks

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated material lin-ing is placed

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of linedmaterial

Material 2 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along gardinglinks

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated material lin-ing is placed

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of linedmaterial

Material 3 Thickness

102 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 111: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along gardinglinks

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation

Behavior

The following steps are used by this subassembly to determine whichconditions apply:

1 The location of the Cut Test Point (see diagram) is calculated using theForeslope Width, Foreslope Slope, and Ditch Width parameters.

2 If any portion of the foreslope slope or ditch bottom is in cut, the sectionis computed as a cut section as follows:

■ If the Cut Test Point is above the target surface, the Foreslope link orditch bottom is truncated at the point where it intersects the surfacegoing from cut to fill, otherwise:

DaylightStandard | 103

Page 112: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

■ If Include Daylight Link is set to omit, no daylight link is calculated.

■ The intercept to the target surface is calculated using the Flat CutSlope value.

■ If the height of the flat cut slope exceeds the Flat Cut Max Height,the intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the MediumCut Slope value.

■ If the height of the medium cut slope exceeds the Medium Cut MaxHeight, the intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using theSteep Cut Slope value.

3 If no portion of the foreslope link or ditch bottom is below the targetsurface, the section is computed as a Fill section as follows:

■ The intercept to the target surface is calculated using the Flat Fill Slopevalue.

■ If the height of the flat fill slope exceeds the Flat Fill Max Height, theintercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the Medium FillSlope value.

■ If the height of the medium fill slope exceeds the Medium Fill MaxHeight, the guardrail widening link is added to the assembly usingthe Guardrail Width and Guardrail %Slope parameters (unless theGuardrail Width is zero). The intercept to the target surface isre-calculated from the putside edge of the guardrail widening linkusing the Steep Fill Slope value.

■ If Include Daylight Link is True, the flat, medium, or steep fill slopelink is added to the assembly.

A guardrail structure may be applied to fill sections that meet the criteria forusing the steep fill slope. If this criteria is met, the Guardrail Width is not zero,and Include Guardrail is set to true, then a guardrail structure is drawn at the

104 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 113: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

station. The dimensions of the guardrail structure are fixed as shown in thediagram below.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly shows both the cut and fill flat-slopeconditions. The daylight links are extended outward for a horizontal distanceof 3 meters or 10 feet, and are shown in dashed lines terminating in arrowheadspointing outwards.

DaylightStandard | 105

Page 114: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge point for the normal fill conditionHingeP1Hinge_Fill

Hinge point for the fill condition withguardrail widening

HingeHinge_Fill

P2

Inside edge of the bottom of the ditch (cutcondition only)

Ditch_InP2

Outside edge of the bottom of the ditch(cut condition only)

Ditch_OutHinge

P3

Hinge_Cut

Fill slopestake point (fill condition only)DaylightP3Daylight_Fill

Cut slopestake point (cut condition only)DaylightP4Daylight_Cut

All links added by this subassembly, exceptfor the guardrail structure links.

TopDatum

All Links

No codes are assigned to the points on theguardrail strucure, if included.

NoneGuardrail points

All links comprising the guardrail strucure,if included.

GuardrailGuardrail links

Daylight link for cut sectionTopL3

106 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 115: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopFill Daylight LinkDatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

Coding Diagram

DaylightStandard | 107

Page 116: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DaylightToOffsetInserts a daylight link from the attachment point to a given offset from thebaseline.

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the daylight link.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0Numeric+/- offset of the daylight point from thebaseline

Daylight Offset fromBaseline

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material liningalong daylight links. You can choose All

Place Lined Material

Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, andNone.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the as-sociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 1

12 inch-es

Numeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thickness

108 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 117: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the as-sociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the as-sociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thickness

SeededGrass

StringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Day-light Offset and tie the daylight offset toan offset alignment

AlignmentDaylight Offset

RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset

DaylightToOffset | 109

Page 118: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation

Behavior

A daylight ink is inserted from the attachment point to the surface at thegiven offset.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays a link extending outwards at a -4: 1 slope to the specified offset. The daylight link terminates with an arrowheadpointing outwards.

110 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 119: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge point. Hinge_Cut is used if the daylight linkhas an upward slope; Hinge_Fill is used if the daylightlink has a downward slope.

HingeHinge_Cut orHinge_Fill

P1

Daylight pointDaylightP2Daylight_Cut orDaylight_Fill

Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

Coding Diagram

DaylightToROWInserts a daylight link from the attachment point to a given offset from theright-of-way limit on a target surface.

DaylightToROW | 111

Page 120: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the daylight link.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0Numeric+/- offset of the right-of-way limit fromthe baseline

ROW Offset from Baseline

0.0Numeric+/- value added to the ROW Limit Offset.A negative adjustment value moves the

Offset Adjustment

daylight point inside of the ROW limit;a positive value moves it outside theROW limit.

NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material liningalong daylight links. You can choose All

Place Lined Material

Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, andNone.

1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 1

112 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 121: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

12 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links

Material 1 Name

2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 2

6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thickness

Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links

Material 2 Name

4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed

Slope Limit 3

4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive

Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thickness

SeededGrass

StringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links

Material 3 Name

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed ROWOffset and tie the ROW offset to an off-set alignment

AlignmentROW Offset

RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface

DaylightToROW | 113

Page 122: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation

Behavior

The daylight offset is calculated as the ROW Limit Offset plus or minus theOffset Adjustment. A daylight link is inserted from the attachment point tothe calculated offset on the target surface.

Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.

If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays a link extending outwards at a -4: 1 slope to the right-of-way offset, plus or minus the offset adjustment. Thedaylight link terminates with an arrowhead pointing outwards.

114 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 123: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Hinge point. Hinge_Cut is used if thedaylight link has an upward slope;

HingeHinge_Cut or

P1

Hinge_Fill is used if the daylight link hasa downward slope.

Hinge_Fill

Daylight pointDaylightP2Daylight_Cut orDaylight_Fill

Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut

Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill

Coding Diagram

GenericPavementStructureThis subassembly creates a simple pavement structure with user-definablepoint, link, and shape codes.

GenericPavementStructure | 115

Page 124: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

This subassembly can be used as a lane or shoulder using superelevationparameters for the slope. The width and outside edge elevation can becalculated based on an optional alignment and profile. This subassembly canbe stacked one below another to form multiple layers, or butted side by sideto form multiple lanes with or without grade breaks. If multipleGenericPavementStructure subassemblies are stacked, the bottom slope canbe used as the top slope of subsequent layers. Optionally, the bottom widthof the subsequent subassembly can be assigned as the width of the previoussubassembly.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the upper inside edge of the pavement structure.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassem-bly is inserted towards.

Side

3.6 m 12.0 ftNumeric, positiveWidth of the subassembly.Width

0.2 m 0.67 ftNumeric, positiveSpecifies optional additional widthto add.

Shift Width

-2%NumericDefault slope of the top link, whensuperelevation slope for the align-ment is not specified.

Default CrossSlope

116 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 125: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoList of options (a) No, (b)Outside lane slope, (c) In-

Specifies to use slope from superel-evation specification defined on thebaseline alignment.

Use Supereleva-tion Slope

side lane slope, (d) Outsideshoulder slope, (e) Insideshoulder slope

0.2 m 0.67 ftNumeric, positiveDepth from top link to the bottomlink of the subassembly.

Depth

NoBoolean Yes/NoIndicates to deflect outside verticalface to a specified slope.

Deflect OuterVertical Face

1:1NumericSpecifies the slope of the outeredge if choose not to be vertical.

Outer Edge Slope

StringSpecifies point codes to the insidepoint on the top link.

Inside-Top PointCodes

StringSpecifies point codes to the outsidepoint on the top link.

Outside-TopPoint Codes

StringSpecifies point codes to the outsidepoint on the bottom link.

Outside-BottomPoint Codes

StringSpecifies point codes to the insidepoint on the bottom link.

Inside-BottomPoint Codes

StringSpecifies codes to the top link.Top Link Codes

StringSpecifies codes to the top link.Bottom LinkCodes

StringSpecifies codes to the top link.Right Link Codes

StringSpecifies codes to the top link.Left Link Codes

GenericPavementStructure | 117

Page 126: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

StringSpecifies codes for the enclosedshape of the structure.

Shape Codes

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed widthand tie the point on the top link whichdefines “width” to an offset alignment.

AlignmentWidth

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed slopeand tie the point on the top link whichdefines “width” to an offset profile.

ProfileEdge Elevation

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Left / RightIndicates which side the subassembly is in-serted towards.

Side

Numeric, positiveTotal width of the top link including the ef-fective shift width.

Top Width

Numeric, positiveTotal bottom width of the pavement struc-ture including the shift width and width dueto the deflected outer face.

Bottom Width

Numeric, positiveDepth from top link to the bottomDepth

NumericCross slope of the structure.Cross Slope

118 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 127: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

This subassembly builds a skeletal subassembly that lets you specify variousparameters. All point, link, and shape codes can be user-defined as needed.Additionally, this subassembly can get slopes from a runtime logicalassignments (profile), or from the superelevation specified on the alignment.It can also assign the width from an offset alignment.

While defining an assembly, you can assign the width of the previoussubassembly (the one above), plus a shift width to the subassembly, so thatstepped layers are possible.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, the subassembly draws the lane using the input parametervalues.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

LaneBrokenBackCreates a cross-sectional representation of travel lanes for a broken-backroadway, where the inside and outside lanes have different downward slopes.

This subassembly is used for the inside lanes on divided, broken-back highways.The pavement structure follows the standards described in “Pavement Structureon Paved Sections” in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

LaneBrokenBack | 119

Page 128: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to placethe subassembly

Side

NoYes / NoSpecifies that inside edge oftravelway to be coded asCrown

Crown Point on Inside

3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the inside lanesInside Width12.0 ft

- 2.0 (%)NumericDefault % Slope of the insidelanes to be used if the superel-

Inside Default %Slope

evation for the alignment isnot defined

3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the outside lanesOutside Width12.0 ft

120 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 129: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

- 2.0 (%)NumericDefault % Slope of the out-side lanes to be used if the

Outside Default %Slope

superelevation for the align-ment is not defined

0.025 mNumeric, postiiveThickness of the Pave1 layer(zero to omit)

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 layer(zero to omit)

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Base layerBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed InsideWidth and tie the edge-of-inside-lane to anoffset alignment

AlignmentInside Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed OutsideWidth and tie the edge-of-outside-lane toan offset alignment

AlignmentOutside Width

OptionalMay be used to override the normal slopeand tie the elevation of the edge-of-inside-lane to the elevation of a profile

ProfileInside Elevation

OptionalMay be used to override the normal slopeand tie the elevation of the edge-of-outside-lane to the elevation of a profile

ProfileOutside Elevation

LaneBrokenBack | 121

Page 130: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the inside laneInside %Slope

Numeric% slope of the outside laneOutside %Slope

Behavior

This subassembly creates a set of inside lanes and outside lanes that may havedifferent slopes. The inside lanes are inserted outwards from the attachmentpoint using the Inside Lane superelevation slope. If the superelevation is notdefined at a station, the Inside Default %Slope value is used. The outside lanesare inserted outward from the end of the inside lanes, using the outside lanesuperelevation slope, or the Outside Default %Slope.

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subasssembly displays the finish, base, and subbase linksfor the given widths and depths at the default % slopes.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3

Crown point of the corridor (optional)CrownP1

Lane breakpoint on finish gradeLaneP2

Edges of lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P4, P6

Crown point on Pave1 (optional)Crown_Pave1P4

Lane break point on Pave1Lane_Pave1P5

122 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 131: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Edges of lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P7, P9

Crown point on Pave2 (optional)Crown_Pave2P7

Lane break point on Pave2Lane_Pave2P8

Edges of lane on the Base layerETW_BaseP10, P12

Crown point on base layer (optional)Crown_BaseP10

Lane break point on the Base layerLane_BaseP11

Edges of lane on the Subbase layerETW _SubP13, P15

Crown point on subbase layer (optional)Crown_SubP13

Lane break point on the Subbase layerLane_SubP14

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2

Pave1L3, L4

Pave2L5, L6

BaseL7, L8

SubBaseL9, L10Datum

Pave1S1

Pave2S2

BaseS3

LaneBrokenBack | 123

Page 132: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

SubbaseS4

Coding Diagram

LaneFromTaperedMedian1Inserts one or more travel lanes outward at a constant grade from an alignmentthat defines the edge of a median that tapers to allow for left-turn lanes.

The alignment defining the edge of the median may at times be either notpresent (Case 1), outside the roadway centerline (Case 2), or inside of thecenterline (Case 3). To use this subassembly you should have separatealignments defining the left and right edges of the median. It may be necessaryto define separate corridor model regions for each individual median.

124 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 133: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

LaneFromTaperedMedian1 | 125

Page 134: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the location where the inside edge-of-traveled-waywould be if there was no median. This is typically at the assembly baseline,but may be at any marker point on the assembly.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side toplace the subassembly

Side

3.6 mNumericWidth of the lane for thecondition where there is

Lane Width12.0 ft

no median; that is, fromthe attachment point tothe outside edge-of-trav-eled-way.

LOString% slope of the lanes. Theslope can be a numeric

%Slope

value, or can use the fol-lowing codes to matchpre-defined superelevation

126 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 135: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

specifications of the base-line alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slope

0.0Numeric, positiveUsed if the Median Edgealignment is at a fixed off-

Inside Adjustment

set from the actual edge-of-traveled-way (for exam-ple, at the back of curb).Adjusts the calculated LaneWidth to account for theoffset (see diagram).

0.0Numeric, positiveUsed if the Outside LaneWidth alignment is at a

Outside Adjustment

fixed offset from the actualedge-of-traveled-way (forexample, at the back ofcurb). Adjusts the calculat-ed Lane Width to accountfor the offset (see dia-gram).

0.025 mNumeric, postiiveDepth between finishgrade and Pave1

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric, positiveDepth between Pave1 andPave2

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric, positiveDepth between Pave1 andBase

Base Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumericDepth of the Subbase layerat the attachment point

Subbase Depth1.0 ft

LaneFromTaperedMedian1 | 127

Page 136: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to shift the starting offset ofthe lane to follow an edge-of-medianalignment

AlignmentMedian Edge

OptionalMay be used to shift the ending offset ofthe lane to follow an edge-of-lane align-ment

AlignmentLane Width

OptionalMay be used to override the normal laneslope and tie the outer edge of the travellane to the elevation of a profile

ProfileOutside Elevation

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope

Behavior

Outside Edge-of-Traveled-Way: The width to the outside edge-of-traveled-waycan be defined by a fixed numeric width, or an alignment can be used tooverride the width. The elevation is determined by applying the specifiedslope for the width of the lane, unless an Outside Elevation profile is given.In that case, the outside edge elevation is tied to the profile, and the slope isadjusted.

The location of the inside edge-of-traveled-way is calculated based on thethree cases shown in the preceding diagram. If no Median Edge alignment isgiven, or the given one is not found at a station, the inside edge is held at theattachment point (Case 1). If a Median Edge alignment is given, and thatalignment is outside the lane’s attachment point, the inside edge is shiftedoutward from the attachment point at lane slope (Case 2). If the Median Edgealignment is inside the lane’s attachment point, the inside edge is shiftedinward from the attachment point at the lane slope (Case 3).

128 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 137: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Inside and Outside Adjustments: The Inside Adjustment and OutsideAdjustment parameters are provided in case the alignment used for the medianedge or lane edge is at a fixed offset from the actual edge-of-traveled-way. Forexample, the alignment being used for the Median Edge may be at theback-of-curb instead of at the pavement edge. In this case the InsideAdjustment parameter should be set to the width of the curb.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the lane forthe given width and slope. If a superelevation slope is given (LI or LO), thelinks are displayed at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P2

Edges of lane on Pave1 layerETW_Pave1P3, P4

Edges of lane on Pave2 layerETW_Pave2P5, P6

Edges of lane on Base layerETW_BaseP7, P8

Edges of lane on Subbase layerETW _SubP9, P10

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1

Pave1 surfacePave1L2

LaneFromTaperedMedian1 | 129

Page 138: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Pave2 surfacePave2L3

Base surfaceBaseL4

Subbase surfaceSubBase, DatumL5

Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1

Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2

Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3

Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4

Coding Diagram

LaneFromTaperedMedian2Inserts one or more travel lanes outward from an alignment that defines theedge of a median.

130 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 139: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

The alignment defining the edge of the median may at times be either notpresent (Case 1), outside the roadway centerline (Case 2), or inside thecenterline (Case 3).

To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right edges of the median. It may be necessary to define separatecorridor model regions for each individual median. This subassembly differsfrom LaneFromTaperedMedian1 in that it provides for a grade break withdifferent slopes in the travel lanes.

LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 131

Page 140: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the location where the inside edge-of-traveled-waywould be if there was no median. This is typically at the assembly baseline.

132 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 141: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates the outward direc-tion of the lane

Side

3.6 mNumericWidth of the inside lane forthe condition where there

Inside Lane Width12.0 ft

is no median; that is, fromthe attachment point tothe grade break point.

LIString% slope of the inside lanes,in the outward direction.

Inside %Slope

The slope can be a numer-ic value, or can use the fol-lowing codes to matchpre-defined superelevationspecifications of the base-line alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slope

3.6 mNumericWidth from the gradebreak point to the outsideedge-of-traveled-way.

Outside Lane Width12.0 ft

LOString% slope of the outsidelanes, in the outward direc-

Outside %Slope

tion. The slope can be anumeric value, or can usethe following codes tomatch pre-defined superel-evation specifications ofthe baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation Type

LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 133

Page 142: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

LI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slope

0.0Numeric, positiveUsed if the Median Edgealignment is at a fixed off-

Inside Adjustment

set from the actual edge-of-traveled-way (for exam-ple, at the back of curb).Adjusts the calculated In-side Lane Width to accountfor the offset (see dia-gram).

0.0Numeric, positiveUsed if the Outside LaneWidth alignment is at a

Outside Adjustment

fixed offset from the actualedge-of-traveled-way (forexample, at the back ofcurb). Adjusts the calculat-ed Outside Lane Width toaccount for the offset (seediagram).

0.025 mNumeric, postiiveDepth between finishgrade and Pave1

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric, positiveDepth between Pave1 andPave2

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric, positiveDepth between Pave1 andBase

Base Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumericDepth of the Subbase layerat the attachment point

Subbase Depth1.0 ft

Note that if the Inside %Slope value is always the same as Outside %Slope, orif Inside Lane Width is zero, then the simpler LaneFromTaperedMedian1subassembly can be used instead.

134 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 143: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to shift the starting offset ofthe lane to follow an edge-of-medianalignment

AlignmentMedian Edge

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed InsideLane Width and tie the grade break to anoffset alignment

AlignmentInside Lane Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed OutsideLane Width and tie the edge-of-lane toan offset alignment

AlignmentOutside LaneWidth

OptionalMay be used to override the normal laneslope and tie the outer edge of the travellane to the elevation of a profile

ProfileOutside Elevation

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the inside laneInside Lane %Slope

Numeric% slope of the outside laneOutside Lane %Slope

Behavior

Grade Break: The width from the attachment point outwards to the gradebreak between the inside and outside lanes can be defined by a fixed numericwidth, or an alignment can be used to override the width. The elevation atthe grade break is determined by applying the specified slope for the insidelane across the width of the lane.

Outside Edge-of-Traveled-Way: The width to the outside edge-of-traveled-waycan be defined by a fixed numeric width, or an alignment can be used tooverride the width. The elevation is determined by applying the specifiedslope for the width of the lane, unless an Outside Elevation profile is given.

LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 135

Page 144: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

In that case, the outside edge elevation is tied to the profile, and the slope isadjusted.

Inside Edge-of-Traveled-Way: The location of the inside edge-of-traveled-wayis calculated based on the three cases shown in the previous diagram. If aMedian Edge alignment is given, and that alignment is outside of the lane’sattachment point, the inside edge is shifted outward from the attachmentpoint at the lane slope (Case 2). If the Median Edge alignment is inside of thelane’s attachment point, the inside edge is shifted inward from the attachmentpoint at the inside lane slope (Case 3). If no Median Edge alignment is given,or the given one is not found at a station, the inside edge is held at theattachment point (Case 1).

Inside and Outside Adjustments: The Inside Adjustment and OutsideAdjustment parameters are provided in case the alignments used for the insideor outside edges are at a fixed offset from the actual edge-of-traveled-way. Forexample, the alignment being used for the Median Edge may be at theback-of-curb instead of at the pavement edge. In this case, the InsideAdjustment parameter should be set to the width of the curb.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the lanes forthe given widths and slopes. If a superelevation slope is given (LI or LO), thelinks are displayed at a slope of -2%.

136 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 145: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3

Edges of lane on Pave1 layerETW_Pave1P4, P6

Edges of lane on Pave2 layerETW_Pave2P7, P9

Edges of lane on Base layerETW_BaseP10, P12

Edges of lane on Subbase layerETW _SubP13, P15

Crown (grade break) on finish gradeCrownP2

Crown (grade break) on Pave1Crown_Pave1P5

Crown (grade break) on Pave2Crown_Pave2P8

Crown (grade break) on BaseCrown_BaseP11

Crown (grade break) on SubbaseCrown_SubbaseP14

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2

Pave1 surfacePave1L3, L4

Pave2 surfacePave2L5, L6

Base surfaceBaseL7, L8

Subbase surfaceSubBase, DatumL9, L10

Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1

Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2

LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 137

Page 146: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3

Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4

Coding Diagram

LaneInsideSuperCreates a cross-sectional representation of finish grade, base layer, and subbaselayer for a travel lane, applying the Inside Lane superelevation slope value forthe corridor model’s baseline alignment.

It is used for the inside lanes on divided, broken-back highways. The pavementstructure follows the standards described in “Pavement Structure on PavedSections” in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

138 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 147: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side toplace the subassembly

Side

NoYes / NoSpecifies that inside edgeof travelway to be codedas Crown

Crown Point on Inside

3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the lane from theoffset of the inside edge to

Width12.0 ft

the offset of the outsideedge

-2.0NumericDefault % Slope of thelane to be used when the

Default %Slope

superelevation slope of thealignment is not defined

LaneInsideSuper | 139

Page 148: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.025 mNumeric, postiiveThickness of the Pave1 lay-er (zero to omit)

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 lay-er (zero to omit)

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Base layerBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Subbaselayer

Subbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed laneWidth and tie the edge-of-lane to an offsetalignment

AlignmentWidth

OptionalMay be used to override the normal laneslope and tie the outer edge of the travellane to the elevation of a profile

ProfileOutside Elevation

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope

Behavior

The Inside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevationspecifications for the baseline alignment. Starting at the attachment point, afinish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width,depth, and the superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at eitherend of the lane.

140 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 149: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subasssembly displays the lane links using the givenwidth and depths at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Edge-of-traveled-way on finish gradeETWP1

Crown point on finish grade (optional)CrownP1

Outside edge of lane on finish gradeLaneP2

Edge-of-traveled-way on the Pave1 layerETW_Pave1P3

Crown point on the Pave1 layer (optional)Crown_Pave1P3

Outside edge of lane on the Pave1 layerLane_Pave1P4

Edge-of-traveled-way on the Pave2 layerETW_Pave2P5

Crown point on the Pave2 layer (optional)Crown_Pave2P5

Outside edge of lane on the Pave2 layerLane_Pave2P6

LaneInsideSuper | 141

Page 150: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Edge-of-traveled-way edge of lane on theBase layer

ETW_BaseP7

Crown point on base layer (optional)Crown_BaseP7

Outside edge of lane on the Base layerLane_BaseP8

Edge-of-traveled-way edge of lane on thesubbase layer

ETW _SubP9

Crown point on subbase layer (optional)Crown_SubP9

Outside edge of lane on the Subbaselayer

Lane_SubP10

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1

Pave1L2

Pave2L3

Base surfaceBaseL4

Subbase surfaceSubBaseL5Datum

Pave1S1

Pave2S2

BaseS3

SubbaseS4

142 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 151: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

LaneOutsideSuperCreates a cross-sectional representation of a travel lane, applying the OutsideLane superelevation slope value for the corridor model’s baseline alignment.

It is used for most undivided roads, or divided roads with no lane slope breakon either side. It may also be used for the outside lanes of divided crownedor broken-back highways. The pavement structure follows the standardsdescribed in “Pavement Structure on Paved Sections” in the Autodesk Civil3D Help.

LaneOutsideSuper | 143

Page 152: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly

Side

NoYes / NoSpecifies that inside edge of travel-way to be coded as Crown

Crown Point on In-side

144 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 153: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the lane from the offsetof the inside edge to the offset ofthe outside edge

Width12.0 ft

0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the base layerBase Depth0.333 ft

-2.0%NumericDefault % Slope of the lane to beused when the superelevation slopefor the alignment is not defined

Default %Slope

0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave1 layer (zeroto omit)

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 layer (zeroto omit).

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the base layerBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedlane Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment.

AlignmentWidth

OptionalMay be used to override the nor-mal lane slope and tie the outer

Profile nameOutside Elevation

edge of the travel lane to the ele-vation of a profile.

LaneOutsideSuper | 145

Page 154: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope

Behavior

The Outside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevationspecifications for the baseline alignment. Starting at the attachment point, afinish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width,depth, and the superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at eitherend of the lane.

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subasssembly displays all lane links using the width anddepth input parameters at a -2% slope.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Crown point on finish grade (optional)CrownP1

Inside edge of lane on finish gradeETWP2

Crown point on the Pave1 layer (optional)Crown_Pave1P3

Inside edge of lane on Pave.ETW_Pave1P4

Crown point on the Pave2 layer (optional)Crown_Pave2P5

Inside edge of lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P6

Crown point on base grade (optional)Crown_BaseP7

146 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 155: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Inside edge of lane on BaseETW_BaseP8

Crown point on subbase grade (optional)Crown_SubP9

Inside edge of lane on SubbaseETW_SubP10

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1

Pave1 surfacePave1L2

Pave2 surfacePave2L3

Base surfaceBaseL4

Subbase surfaceSubbaseL5Datum

Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1

Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2

Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3

Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4

Coding Diagram

LaneOutsideSuper | 147

Page 156: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

LaneOutsideSuperWithWideningThis subassembly inserts a travel lane, applying the Outside Lane superelevationslope value, and widens the pavement at superelevated regions.

It can be used for most undivided roads, or divided roads with no lane slopebreak on either side. It may also be used for the outside lanes of dividedcrowned or broken-back highways. The pavement structure follows thestandards described in “Pavement Structure on Paved Sections” in the AutodeskCivil 3D Help. The only difference between this subassembly and theLaneOutsideSuper subassembly is that this subassembly also widens thepavement width in superelevated regions of the corridor.

148 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 157: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly

Side

3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the lane from the offsetof the inside edge to the offset ofthe outside edge

Width12.0 ft

-2.0NumericDefault % slope of the lane to beused when the superelevation slopefor the alignment is not defined

Default %Slope

0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave1 layer (zeroto omit)

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 layer (zeroto omit)

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the base layerBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft

10 mNumeric, positiveLength of the vehicle wheelbase,including front overhang

Wheelbase Length33 ft

LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening | 149

Page 158: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

1Integer, positiveNumber of planned travel lanes inthis subassembly

Number of TravelLanes

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedlane Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment

AlignmentWidth

OptionalMay be used to override the nor-mal lane slope and tie the outer

Profile nameOutside Elevation

edge of the travel lane to the ele-vation of a profile

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope

Behavior

The Outside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevationspecifications for the baseline alignment. Starting at the attachment point, afinish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width,depth, and the superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at eitherend of the lane.

Lane Widening

If the current station is within a superelevated region, then the lane widthvalue is calculated as follows:

Width = Default Width + Pavement Widening

where Pavement Widening =

150 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 159: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

n = Number of lanes

R = Radius of the alignment at full superelevation

L = Length of wheelbase including the front overhang

The lane should be widened starting from the "End Normal Crown" and bythe time "full super" station lane should be "default width + pavementwidening". If spirals are used, typically this widening transition length is equalto the length of the spiral.

The key steps in completing this conditional subassembly are as follows:

1 Set pavement widening to zero.

2 Get the default width from parameters.

3 Verify whether a station is in Superelevation zone or not.

4 If Yes, then find the radius of curvature at full super station (not currentstation).

5 Compute the pavement widening value from the equation mentionedin the spec (ExtraW).

6 Find out the station value of "End Normal Crown" in this region; andsimilarly find station value of "Full Super"; find the difference as lengthalong alignment to distribute (L).

7 Now, divide ExtraW by L and get that factor RateW.

8 Now, for the current station, find the difference between "end normalcrown" station and current station (DeltaL).

9 Now, multiply RateW by DeltaL to get DeltaW for the current station.

10 Now add this DeltaW to the default Width provided in the subassemblyproperties.

11 Hence, the new width at the current station is = Width+DeltaW.

This DeltW is the only parameter (note that it is not an input parameter) thatwe could show in the following diagram.

LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening | 151

Page 160: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

The preceding diagram is not accurate, but indicative. The black line representscenterline and the blue lines on left and right denotes edges of different laneson right and left sides (after design). The light (gray) coloured lines in thediagram indicate original right and left edges. The deviation of the designededges are due to provision of extra widening.

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subasssembly displays all lane links using the width anddepth input parameters at a -2% slope.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Inside edge of lane on finish gradeETWP2

Inside edge of lane on Pave1.ETW_Pave1P4

Inside edge of lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P6

Inside edge of lane on BaseETW_BaseP8

152 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 161: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Inside edge of lane on SubbaseETW_SubP10

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1

Pave1 surfacePave1L2

Pave2 surfacePave2L3

Base surfaceBaseL4

Subbase surfaceSubbaseL5

Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1

Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2

Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3

Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4

Coding Diagram

LaneParabolicCreates a cross-sectional representation of finish grade, pavement, and subbasefor urban, parabolic lanes between the left and right edges of traveled way.

LaneParabolic | 153

Page 162: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

The parabolic shape is simulated by a series of short, straight-line links. Nosuperelevation is applied to the travel lanes. The pavement structure followsthe standards described in “Pavement Structure on Paved Sections” in theAutodesk Civil 3D Help.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the crown of road on the finish grade surface. Thiscomponent is symmetrical about the attachment point.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.10 mNumeric, positiveHeight from the center point of thestring line to the crown of road

Crown Height0.3333 ft.

7.2 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the roadway from the leftedge-of-traveled-way to the rightedge-of-traveled-way

Width24.0 ft

0.025 mNumeric, positiveDepth between the finish grade andthe Pave1 surface

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric, positiveDepth between the Pave1 and Pave2surfaces

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

154 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 163: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.100 mNumeric, positiveDepth between the Pave2 and Basesurfaces

Base Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric, positiveDepth between the Base and Subbasesurfaces

Subbase Depth1.0 ft

0 (%)Numeric% slope of the string line from the leftETW to the right ETW

%Slope

8Numeric, positive,even

Number of straight line incrementssimulating the parabolic shape

No. Increments

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The center of the string line is calculated by subtracting the Crown Heightfrom the attachment point, and the left and right edges-of-traveled-way arecalculated by applying the Width and Slope symmetrically about theattachment point. The ordinates of the parabolic curve are calculated at evenintervals along the string line, and straight line links are added to connect theordinate points. Parallel surfaces are inserted for the Pave1, Pave2, Base, andSubbase surfaces from the given depths.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the lane links calculated from thegiven input parameters.

LaneParabolic | 155

Page 164: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Outside edges of lane on finish gradeETW

Outside edges of lane on the Base sur-face

ETW_Pave1

Outside edges of lane on subbaseETW_Pave2

Crown point on finish gradeCrown

Crown point on Pave1Crown_Pave1

Crown point on Pave2Crown_Pave2

Crown point on BaseCrown_Base

Crown point on subbaseCrown_Sub

Finish gradeTopPave

Pave1 surfacePave1

Pave2 surfacePave2

Base surfaceBase

Subbase surfaceSubBaseDatum

Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1

Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2

156 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 165: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3

Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4

Coding Diagram

LaneTowardCrownCreates a cross-sectional representation of a travel lane that is being insertedfrom the inside edge of pavement towards the crown point.

It uses the Outside Lane superelevation slope value for the corridor model’sbaseline alignment. The pavement structure follows the standards describedin “Pavement Structure on Paved Sections” in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

LaneTowardCrown | 157

Page 166: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly

Side

3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the lane from the offset ofthe inside edge to the offset of theoutside edge

Width12.0 ft

0.025 mNumeric, postiiveThickness of the Pave1 layer (zero toomit)

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 layer (zero toomit)

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Base layerBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed laneWidth value and tie the edge-of-laneto an offset alignment

AlignmentWidth

158 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 167: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the normallane slope and tie the outer edge of

ProfileCrown Elevation

the travel lane to the elevation of aprofile

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope

Behavior

The Inside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevationspecifications for the baseline alignment, and the algebraic sign of this valueis reversed. If inserting to the left, the Right Outside Lane Slope is obtainedand reversed; if inserting to the right, the Left Outside Lane Slope is obtainedand reversed. Starting at the attachment point, a finish grade surface andparallel subgrade are inserted using the given width, depth, and the reversesuperelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at either end of the lane.

If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the finish, base, and subbase linksfor the given width and depths at a -2% slope.

LaneTowardCrown | 159

Page 168: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Inside edge of lane on finish gradeETWP1

Outside edge of lane (at the crown point) onfinish grade

CrownP2

Inside edge of lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P3

Outside edge of lane on Pave1Crown_Pave1P4

Inside edge of lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P5

Outside edge of lane on Pave2Crown_Pave2P6

Inside edge of lane on the base layerETW_BaseP7

Outside edge of lane on the base layerCrown_BaseP8

Inside edge of lane on the subbase layerETW_SubP9

Outside edge of lane on the subbase layerCrown_SubP10

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1

Pave1L2

Pave2L3

BaseL4

SubbaseL5Datum

Pave1S1

160 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference

Page 169: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape

Pave2S2

BaseS3

SubbaseS4

Coding Diagram

LaneTowardCrown | 161

Page 170: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp
Page 171: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Subassembly Reference(continued)

In this chapter

■ LinkMulti

■ LinkOffsetAndElevation

■ LinkOffsetAndSlope

■ LinkOffsetOnSurface

■ LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection

■ LinkSlopesBetweenPoints

■ LinkSlopeToElevation

■ LinkSlopeToSurface

■ LinkToMarkedPoint

■ LinkVertical

■ LinkWidthAndSlope

■ MarkPoint

■ MedianDepressed

■ MedianDepressedShoulderExt

■ MedianDepressedShoulderVert

■ MedianFlushWithBarrier

■ MedianRaisedConstantSlope

■ MedianRaisedWithCrown

■ OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges

2

163

Page 172: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

■ OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters

■ OverlayCrownBetweenEdges

■ OverlayMedianAsymmetrical

■ OverlayMedianSymmetrical

■ OverlayMillAndLevel1

■ OverlayMillAndLevel2

■ OverlayParabolic

■ OverlayWidenMatchSlope1

■ OverlayWidenMatchSlope2

■ OverlayWidenWithSuper1

164 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 173: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

LinkMultiThis subassembly is a general purpose subassembly to add a series of connectedlinks.

This is typically used to add structural shapes that are not pre-defined assubassemblies. Up to 12 links may be specified. If a shape requires more than12 links, the LinkMulti subassembly can be used multiple times.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the beginning of the first link. The subassemblyis sensitive to the direction being inserted. Positive widths increase the offsetfrom the attachment point in the direction inserted.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to placethe subassembly

Side

0Numeric, positive inte-ger

The number of links used todraw the shape

No. of Links

Top, DatumComma-separatedstring

A list of codes to be assignedto the link

Link Codes

LinkMulti | 165

Page 174: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0Numeric+/- width of the first link. Posi-tive widths are in the directionof insertion.

dW1

0Numeric+/- vertical deflection of thefirst link

dZ1

0Numeric+/- width of the 2nd linkdW2

0Numeric+/- vertical deflection of the2nd link

dZ2

0Numeric. . .. . .(links 3 – 11)

0Numeric+/- width of the 12th linkdW12

0Numeric+/- vertical deflection of the12th link

dZ12

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

Up to 12 links are inserted in sequence at the given widths and verticaldeflections. Shapes are not automatically closed; a closing link must beincluded.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links defined by the inputparameters.

166 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 175: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

Points are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the first link from 1up to 13. Links are numbered sequentially from 1 up to 12.

LinkOffsetAndElevationThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to connect a link from theattachment point to a specified offset and elevation.

An alignment can be substituted for the offset, and a profile for the elevation.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The direction of the linkis determined by the location of the given offset and elevation relative to theattachment point.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

3.0 mNumeric+/- offset of the end of the linkOffsetfrom Baseline10.0 ft

LinkOffsetAndElevation | 167

Page 176: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0NumericElevation at the end of the linkElevation

P2Comma-separatedstring

A list of surface codes to be assignedto the outside edge of the link

Point Codes

Top, DatumComma-separatedstring

A list of codes to be assigned to thelink

Link Codes

Include link,start point andend point

Selection listAdd the link, the start point, and theend point, or omit the link and addthe end point only.

Omit Link

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Off-set and tie the end-of-link to an offsetalignment

AlignmentOffset

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Ele-vation and tie the end-of-link to a pro-file

ProfileElevation

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

168 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 177: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

A link is added from the attachment point to the given offset and elevation.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays a horizontal link using the givenOffset input parameters as the width.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

LinkOffsetAndSlopeThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to connect a link from theattachment point to a specified offset at a given slope.

An alignment can be substituted for the offset, and a profile for the slope.

LinkOffsetAndSlope | 169

Page 178: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The direction of the linkis determined by the location of the given offset and elevation relative to theattachment point.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

10.0 mNumeric+/- offset of the end of the linkOffset from Baseline33.0 ft

% slopeSelection list:True if the slope value is a % slope.Slope Type %% slopeFalse if the slope value is a ratio (x : 1)

slope. X:1 slope

2 (%), (or2:1)

Numeric% slope of the link. Negative slopes godownward in the direction inserted

Slope

P2Comma-separat-ed string

A list of surface codes to be assignedto the outside edge of the link

Point Codes

Top, DatumComma-separat-ed string

A list of codes to be assigned to thelink

Link Codes

Include link,start point

Selection listAdd the link, the start point, and theend point, or omit the link and add theend point only.

Omit Link

and endpoint

170 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 179: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Offsetand tie the end-of-link to an offset align-ment

AlignmentOffset

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Slopeand tie the end-of-link to a profile

ProfileSlope

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

Behavior

A link is added from the attachment point to the given offset at the givenslope.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link calculated from the givenoffset and slope parameters.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

LinkOffsetAndSlope | 171

Page 180: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

LinkOffsetOnSurfaceThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link from theattachment point to a given offset on a target surface.

An alignment can be used when building a corridor model to calculate theoffset.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the beginning of the link.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0Numeric+/- offset to tie the link into the targetsurface

Offset from Base-line

172 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 181: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

P2Comma-separatedstring

A list of surface codes to be assigned tothe outside edge of the link

Point Codes

Top, DatumComma-separatedstring

A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes

Include link, startpoint and endpoint

Selection listAdd the link, the start point, and theend point, or omit the link and add theend point only.

Omit Link

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedOffset and tie the end-of-link to anoffset alignment

AlignmentOffset

RequiredName of the surface the link is ty-ing to

SurfaceTarget Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

Behavior

A link is extended to the point on the target surface at the given offset.

LinkOffsetOnSurface | 173

Page 182: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link drawn to the given offsetat a -4 : 1 slope. The link terminates with an arrowhead pointing outwards.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflectionThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link at a slope for avertical deflection distance.

A profile can be given for the vertical deflection when building a corridormodel.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly canbe inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.

174 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 183: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

% SlopeSelection list:True if the slope value is a % slope.Slope Type %% slopeFalse if the slope value is a ratio (x : 1) slope.X:1 slope

2 (%), (or2:1)

Numeric, positive,nonzero

% or ratio slope of the link.Slope

3.0 mNumeric.non-zero

+/- Vertical deflection between the beginning andend of the link

Vertical Deflec-tion 10.0 ft

P2Comma-sepa-rated string

A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outsideedge of the link

Point Codes

Top, Da-tum

Comma-sepa-rated string

A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes

FalseTrue / FalseFalse to add the link, the start point, and the endpoint.True to add the end point only.

Omit Link

Runtime Logical Assignments

DescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Vertical Deflection andtie the end-of-link to a profile

ProfileVertical Deflection

LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection | 175

Page 184: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

Behavior

A link is added from the attachment point in the direction of insertion forthe given slope until it reaches the given elevation. If a profile name is specifiedat runtime, the vertical deflection is adjusted to match the profile elevation.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link at the given slope andvertical deflection.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

LinkSlopesBetweenPointsThis subassembly is used to insert intersecting links between two points.

176 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 185: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

It is typically used to place intersecting slopes to a V-ditch between the edgesof two adjacent or merging roadways. A flat-bottomed ditch can also bespecified.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the outside edge of either the left or rightintersecting slope, and the previously defined marked point must be on theopposite outside edge. It does not matter which point is left or right of theother. When prompted for marker point, choose attachment point. Be sureto name the marked point and set the marked point name in this subassembly.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringName of the previously defined marked pointMarked Point Name

-4 ( : 1)NumericSlope (x : 1) of the link extending inward from theattachment point. Negative slope values aredownward.

Slope 1

-4 ( : 1)NumericSlope (x : 1) of the link extending inward from themarked point

Slope 2

0.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero fora V-ditch)

Ditch Width2 ft

LinkSlopesBetweenPoints | 177

Page 186: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The locations of the attachment point and marked point are determined. Themarked point may be either to the right or left of the attachment point. Linksare extended inward at Slope 1 from the attachment point, and Slope 2 fromthe marked point, until they intersect. If a non-zero ditch width is given, ahorizontal bottom-of-ditch link is fit into the intersecting side slopes.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the intersecting linksand optional ditch bottom based on the input parameters given and therelative locations of the attachment and marked points.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, orShape

For non-zero ditch width, the edge of ditch closest to theattachment point.

Ditch_InDitch

P2

If the ditch width is zero, use Ditch.

For non-zeroditch width, the edge of ditch closest to themarked point

RMedDitchP3

Finish grade on unpaved shoulder and median linksTopL1 – L3Datum

178 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 187: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

LinkSlopeToElevationThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link at a given slopeuntil it reaches a defined elevation or profile.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly canbe inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassem-bly

Side

% slopeSelection list:% slope if the slope value is a % slope.Slope Type % ?% slopeX : 1 if the slope value is a ratio (X : 1)

slope. X:1 slope

LinkSlopeToElevation | 179

Page 188: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

2 (%), (or 2:1)Numeric, posi-tive

% or ratio slope of the link. Negativeslopes go downward in the direction insert-ed.

Slope

0.0NumericElevation value to extend the link to at thegiven slope

Target Elevation

P2Comma-sepa-rated string

A list of surface codes to be assigned tothe outside edge of the link

Point Codes

Top, DatumComma-sepa-rated string

A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes

Include link,start point andend point

Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the endpoint, or omits the link and adds the endpoint only.

Omit Link

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Target Elevation and tiethe end-of-link to a profile

ProfileTarget Elevation

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

180 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 189: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

A link is added from the attachment point in the direction of insertion forthe given slope until it reaches the target elevation or profile. The slope valueis applied upward if the target elevation is above the attachment point,otherwise a negative slope is used.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link at the given slope for ahorizontal distance of 3 meters or 10 feet.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

LinkSlopeToSurfaceThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link from theattachment point at a given slope to the closest intersection with a targetsurface.

LinkSlopeToSurface | 181

Page 190: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the beginning of the link.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

% SlopeSelectionlist:

True if the slope value is a % slope.False if the slope value is a ratio (x : 1) slope.

Slope Type %

% slopeX:1 slope

2 (%), (or 2:1)Numeric% slope of the link. Negative slopes go downwardin the direction inserted.

Slope

P2Comma-sep-arated string

A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outsideedge of the link

Point Codes

Top, DatumComma-sep-arated string

A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes

Include link,start point andend point

Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the end point,or omits the link and adds the end point only.

Omit Link

182 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 191: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the surface the link istying to

SurfaceTarget Surface

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

Behavior

A link is extended to the left or right from the attachment point at the givenslope until it intersects the target surface.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly attempts to find the intersection of the link,if the target surface was inserted by a previous subassembly. If an intersectionis found, the link is displayed at the given slope to the surface. If not, the linkis displayed at the given slope outward for a horizontal distance of 3 metersor 10 feet, terminating in an arrowhead pointing outward.

LinkSlopeToSurface | 183

Page 192: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

LinkToMarkedPointThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to connect a link from theattachment point to a previously named marked point.

It can be used in a variety of situations, including connecting between adjacentroadways where the relative offsets and elevations vary, or across a gore areabetween converging roadways. Use the MarkPoint subassembly if theconnecting point has not already been named.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The link may go in anydirection. The direction is determined by the location of the marked pointrelative to the attachment point. Be sure to name the marked point and setthe marked point name in this subassembly.

184 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 193: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringName of the marked point to connect toMarked PointName

Top, DatumComma-sepa-rated string

A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes

Include link, startpoint and endpoint

Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the endpoint, or omits the link and adds the endpoint only.

Omit Link

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

Behavior

A link is added from the attachment point to the given marked point.

LinkToMarkedPoint | 185

Page 194: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link between the attachmentpoint and the marked point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

LinkVerticalThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to add a vertical surface link byvertical deflection.

A profile can be used when building a corridor model to allow variable verticaldeflection.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly canbe inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.

186 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 195: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

3.0 mNumeric+/- vertical deflection from the attachment point.Negative deflections are downward.

Vertical Deflection10.0 ft

P2Comma-sepa-rated string

A list of surface codes to be assigned to the out-side edge of the link

Point Codes

Top, DatumComma-sepa-rated string

A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes

Include link,start point andend point

Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the end point,or omits the link and adds the end point only.

Omit Link

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Vertical Deflection andtie the end-of-link to a profile

ProfileVertical Deflection

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

LinkVertical | 187

Page 196: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

A vertical link is added from the attachment point for the given verticaldeflection. If a profile name is given for the Vertical Deflection, the end ofthe link will match the profile elevation.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link for the given +/- verticaldeflection.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

LinkWidthAndSlopeThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to add a surface link by specifyingits width and slope.

Either a % slope or ratio slope value may be given. An alignment or profilecan be used when building a corridor model to allow variable width and slope.

188 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 197: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly canbe inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

LeftLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

3.0Numeric, posi-tive

Width of the lane from the offset of the inside edgeto the offset of the outside edge

Width10.0 ft

% slopeSelection list:Specifies whether the slope value represents a % slopeor an x : 1 slope.

Slope Type% slopex : 1 slope

2 (%), (or2:1)

Numeric% slope of the link. Negative slopes go downward inthe direction inserted.

Slope

P2Comma-separat-ed string

A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outsideedge of the link

Point Codes

Top, Da-tum

Comma-separat-ed string

A list of surface codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes

Includelink, start

Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the end point, oromits the link and adds the end point only.

Omit Link

point andend point

LinkWidthAndSlope | 189

Page 198: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed link Width and tie the

AlignmentWidth

end-of-link to an offset align-ment

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed % Slope and tie the end-of-link to a profile

Profile%Slope

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

Behavior

The link is added in the direction of insertion starting at the attachment pointand going the given width and slope. If an offset horizontal alignment nameis assigned to the Width during corridor modeling, the width of the lane willvary to match the offset of the alignment. If a profile name is assigned to theSlope, the slope is adjusted to match the profile elevation at the end of thelink.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link at the given width andslope.

190 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 199: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

Coding Diagram

MarkPointThis subassembly is used to mark an existing point on the assembly with aname.

This is usually done so that other subassemblies can later insert links thatattach back to this point (for example, LinkToMarkedPoint). The attachmentpoint is the point that is marked. You can add user-defined point coodes tothis marked point.

In the example below, there are two roadways with independent profiles.Once the links for the first roadway are created, the point at the left outsideedge is being marked. Later, after the links for the second roadway are created,a link can be inserted from its right outside edge back to the marked point.

Attachment

The marked point name is placed at the attachment point.

MarkPoint | 191

Page 200: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringName to mark the attachment point withPoint Name

MarkedPointStringSpecify point codes at this location as needed,comma-separated, if multiple

Point Codes

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

A name is assigned to the selected attachment point. This point can bereferenced by name in subassemblies added later to the assembly.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws a triangle symbol at the location ofthe marked point, and labels the marked point name above the point.

192 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 201: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link

Marked point codeMarkedPointP1

Coding Diagram

None.

MedianDepressedThis subassembly creates a cross-sectional representation of a depressed medianbetween the attachment point and a previously named marked point.

Use the MarkPoint subassembly first if the connecting point has not alreadybeen marked.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the outside edge of either the left or right medianditch slope, and the previously defined marked point must be on the oppositeoutside edge. It does not matter which point is left or right of the other.

MedianDepressed | 193

Page 202: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringName of the previously defined marked pointMarked PointName

-4 ( : 1)NumericSlope (x : 1) of the link extending inward fromthe attachment point

Slope 1

-4 ( : 1)NumericSlope (x : 1) of the link extending inward fromthe marked point

Slope 2

Hold ditchsideslopes,

Selection listFor the cases where the top-of-ditch-slopepoints are at unequal elevations, selects

Hold DitchSlopes

shift ditchfrom center

whether to hold the ditch sideslopes and letthe position of the ditch shift, or to hold theditch at the center and adjust the sideslope onthe high side.

0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the bottom of the median ditch (zerofor a V-ditch)

Ditch Width2 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The locations of the attachment point and marked point are determined. Themarked point may be either to the right or left of the attachment point. Linksare extended inward at Slope 1 from the attachment point, and at Slope 2

194 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 203: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

from the marked point, until they intersect. If a ditch width is given, ahorizontal bottom-of-ditch link is fit into the intersecting side slopes.

Ditch Slopes

The top of the ditch slopes may be at different elevations on the left and rightsides, resulting in an asymmetrical ditch. There are two options for handlingthis situation. If Hold Ditch Slopes is set to True, then the Slope 1 and Slope2 values are held on both sides, shifting the bottom of ditch away from thecenterline towards the lower side. If set to False, the ditch bottom is centeredabout the midpoint offset between the tops-of-slopes, the given slope is heldon the lower side, and the slope is adjusted to match on the higher side.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape

Left edge of median ditchLMedDitchP2

MedianDepressed | 195

Page 204: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape

Right edge of median ditchRMedDitchP3

Finish grade on unpaved shoulder and median linksTopL1 – L3Datum

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the median linksbased on the input parameters given and the relative locations of theattachment point and marked point.

Coding Diagram

MedianDepressedShoulderExtThis subassembly creates a cross-sectional representation of a depressed medianwith inside shoulders, using extended termination of shoulder subbase.

It supports superelevation pivoting about the attachment point at thecenterline, or about the attachment point elevation at the insideedges-of-traveled-way. The pavement structure on the paved portions of theshoulder follows the standards described in "Pavement Structure of PavedSections" in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

196 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 205: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is above the centerline of the ditch. The location of themedian links relative to the attachment point varies depending on the pivotmethod, and in some cases, the median widths and lane slopes. The attachmentpoint is typically placed on the baseline alignment at the design profileelevation.

MedianDepressedShoulderExt | 197

Page 206: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero fora V-ditch)

Ditch Width2 ft

25%Numeric,positive

Inward slope from the shoulders toward the bottomof ditch (x : 1)

Ditch Slope

Hold ditchsideslopes,

Selectionlist

For the cases where the top-of-ditch-slope pointsare at unequal elevations, selects whether to hold

Hold Ditch Slopes

shift ditchthe ditch sideslopes and let the position of the ditchfrom cen-ter

shift, or to hold the ditch at the center and adjustthe sideslope on the high side

Pivotabout cen-terline

Selectionlist

Select whether the profile grade and pivot point isat the centerline above the median ditch, or if it isheld at the inside edges-of-traveled-ways

Centerline Pivot?

6.6 mNumeric,positive

Width from the median centerline to the left insideedge-of-traveled-way

Left Median Width22 ft

6.6 mNumeric,positive

Width from the median centerline to the right in-side edge-of-traveled-way

Right Median Width22 ft

0.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the paved inside shoulderPaved ShoulderWidth 2.0 ft

0.0Numeric,positive

Width that the Pave1 layer extends beyond theedge-of-shoulder. The bottom of the Pave1 layermay not extend beyond the ditch sideslope.

Pave1 Extension

0.0Numeric,positive

Width that the Pave2 layer extends beyond theedge-of-shoulder. This should be equal to or greater

Pave2 Extension

198 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 207: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

than the Pave1 extension. The bottom of the Pave2layer may not extend beyond the ditch sideslope.

0.0Numeric,positive

Width that the Base layer extends beyond the edge-of-shoulder. This should be equal to or greater than

Base Extension

the Pave2 extension. If a large value is used, theBase layer is terminated at the intersection with theditch slope.The Base layer should not extend be-yond the ditch sideslope.

0.025 m,Numeric,positive

Depth between the paved shoulders’ finish gradeand Pave1 surfaces

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 m,Numeric,positive

Depth between the paved shoulders’ Pave1 andPave2 surfaces

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth between the paved shoulders’ Pave2 andBase surfaces

Base Depth0.333 ft

0.3 mNumeric,positive

Depth between the paved shoulders’ Base andSubbase surfaces

Subbase Depth1 ft

0Numeric,positive

Width of the optional turning lane on the left sideLeft Turn Lane Width

0Numeric,positive

Width of the optional turning lane on the right sideRight Turn LaneWidth

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override theDitch Slope and tie the medi-

ProfileDitch Slope

an bottom-of-ditch to a pro-file

MedianDepressedShoulderExt | 199

Page 208: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Left Median Width and

AlignmentLeft Median Width

tie the left inside edge-of-traveled-way to an offsetalignment.

OptionalMay be used to ovrride thefixed Right Median Width

AlignmentRight Median Width

and tie the right inside edge-of-traveled-way to an offsetalignment

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly cannot be inserted separately for the left and right sides. Itbuilds the median to both sides of the attachment point.

Superelevation Pivot Point

The median can be configured to have the pivot point at the centerline, or atthe inside edges of traveled ways. If Centerline Pivot is used, the left and rightoutside lane superelevation slopes are obtained from the baseline’ssuperelevation specifications, and the elevations of the insideedges-of-traveled-ways are calculated by applying these slopes to the left andright median widths from the attachment point. If Centerline Pivot is notused, the edges-of-traveled-ways are held to the elevation of the attachmentpoint.

Ditch Elevations and Slopes

Superelevation or turning lanes may cause the top of the ditch slopes to be atdifferent elevations on the left and right sides, resulting in an asymmetricalditch. There are two options for handling this situation. If Hold Ditch Slopesis set to True, then the given ditch slopes are held constant on both sides,which shifts the bottom of ditch away from the centerline towards the lowerside. If set to False, the ditch bottom is centered about the median centerline,the given slope is held on the lower side, and the slope is adjusted to matchon the higher side.

200 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 209: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Shoulder Treatment

The paved shoulders follow the slopes defined for the left and right insideshoulder slopes for the baseline alignment’s superelevation specifications.These slopes are applied inward from the inside edges of traveled ways. Thesubbase surfaces follows the same slope as the finished grade, and is extendedinwards to the intersections with the ditch slopes.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the median andshoulders based on the input parameters given, with lane slopes of -2%, pavedshoulder slopes of -5%, and turning lane widths of zero.

MedianDepressedShoulderExt | 201

Page 210: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape

As shown belowPoints

As shown belowLinks

Pave1S1

Pave2S2

BaseS3

SubbaseS4

Coding Diagram

202 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 211: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

MedianDepressedShoulderVertThis subassembly creates a cross-sectional representation of a depressed medianwith inside shoulders, using vertical termination of shoulder subbase.

It supports superelevation pivoting about the attachment point at thecenterline, or about the attachment point elevation at the insideedges-of-traveled-way. The pavement structure on the paved portions of theshoulder follows the standards described in "Pavement Structure of PavedSections" in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 203

Page 212: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Table of SlopesTable of Widths

Ditch of ForeslopeS1DitchW1

Unpaved Shoulder SlopeS2Left MedianW2

Left Inside SuperelevationS3Right MedianW3

204 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 213: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Table of SlopesTable of Widths

Right Inside SuperelevationShoulder Slope

S4Paved ShoulderW4

Left Outside Lane SlopeS5Unpaved ShoulderW5

Right Outside Lane SlopeS6Left Turn LaneW6

Right Turn LaneW7

Attachment

The attachment point is above the centerline of the ditch. The location of themedian links relative to the attachment point varies depending on the pivotmethod, and in some cases, the median widths and lane slopes. The attachmentpoint is typically placed on the baseline alignment at the design profileelevation.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero fora V-ditch

Ditch Width2 ft

25%Numeric,positive

Inward slope from the shoulders toward the bottomof ditch (x : 1)

Ditch Slope

Hold ditchsideslopes,

Selectionlist

For the cases where the top-of-ditch-slope pointsare at unequal elevations, selects whether to hold

Hold Ditch Slopes

shift ditchthe ditch sideslopes and let the position of the ditchfrom cen-ter

shift, or to hold the ditch at the center and adjustthe sideslope on the high side.

MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 205

Page 214: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Pivotabout cen-terline

Selectionlist

Select whether the profile grade and pivot point isat the centerline above the median ditch, or if it isheld at the inside edges-of-traveled-ways

Centerline Pivot?

6.6 mNumeric,positive

Width from the median centerline to the left insideedge-of-traveled-way

Left Median Width22 ft

6.6 mNumeric,positive

Width from the median centerline to the right insideedge-of-traveled-way

Right Median Width22 ft

0.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the paved portion of the inside shoulderPaved ShoulderWidth 2.0 ft

1.2 mNumeric,positive

Width of the unpaved portion of the inside shoulderUnpaved ShoulderWidth 4.0 ft

-6 (%)Numeric% slope of the unpaved portion of the insideshoulder

Unpaved Shoulder%Slope

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Depth between the finish grade and Pave1 surfacePave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Depth between the Pave1 and Pave2 surfacesPave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth between the Pave2 and Base surfacesBase Depth0.333 ft

0.3 mNumeric,positive

Depth between the paved shoulders’ finish gradeand subbase surfaces

Subbase Depth1 ft

0Numeric,positive

Width of the optional turning lane on the left sideLeft Turn Lane Width

0Numeric,positive

Width of the optional turning lane on the right sideRight Turn LaneWidth

206 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 215: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the Ditch Slope andtie the median bottom-of-ditch to a profile

ProfileDitch Slope

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Left Medi-an Width and tie the left inside edge-of-traveled-way to an offset alignment

AlignmentLeft Median Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed RightMedian Width and tie the right inside edge-of-traveled-way to an offset alignment

AlignmentRight Median Width

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly cannot be inserted separately for the left and right sides. Itbuilds the median to both sides of the attachment point.

Superelevation Pivot Point

The median can be configured to have the superelevation pivot point at thecenterline, or at the inside edges of traveled ways. If Centerline Pivot is used,the left and right outside lane superelevation slopes are obtained from thebaseline’s superelevation specifications, and the elevations of the insideedges-of-traveled-ways are calculated by applying these slopes to the left andright median widths from the attachment point. If Centerline Pivot is notused, the edges-of-traveled-ways are held to the elevation of the attachmentpoint.

Ditch Elevations and Slopes

Superelevation or turning lanes may cause the top of the ditch slopes to be atdifferent elevations on the left and right sides, resulting in an asymetricalditch. There are two options for handling this situation. If Hold Ditch Slopesis set to True, then the given ditch slopes are held constant on both sides,which shifts the bottom of ditch away from the centerline towards the lowerside. If set to False, the ditch bottom is centered about the median centerline,

MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 207

Page 216: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

the given slope is held on the lower side, and the slope is adjusted to matchon the higher side.

Shoulder Treatment

The paved portions of the shoulders follow the slopes defined for the left andright inside shoulder slopes for the baseline alignment’s superelevationspecifications. These slopes are applied inward from the inside edges of traveledways. The unpaved portions of the shoulders are fixed at the given UnpavedShoulder %Slope value.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the median andshoulders based on the input parameters given, and assuming that the laneslopes are -2% and the paved shoulder slopes are -5%.

208 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 217: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, orShape

Edges of paved shoulder on finish gradeEPSP2, P7

Edges of paved shoulder on Pave1EPS_Pave1P10, P17

Edges of paved shoulder on Pave2EPS_Pave2P12, P19

Edges of paved shoulder on BaseEPS_BaseP14, P21

Edges of paved shoulder on SubbaseEPS_SubP16, P23

Edges of gravel shoulderES_UnpavedP3, P6

Left edge of median ditchLMedDitchP4

Right edge of median ditchRMedDitchP5

Finish grade on paved shouldersTopL1, L7Pave

Finish grade on unpaved shoulder and median linksTopL2 – L6Datum

Pave1L8, L12

Pave2L9, L13

BaseL10, L14

SubBaseL11, L15

Subbase and vertical links on paved shouldersDatumL11, L15, L16,L17

MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 209

Page 218: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link, orShape

Pave1S1, S5

Pave2S2, S6

BaseS3, S7

SubbaseS4, S8

Coding Diagram

MedianFlushWithBarrierThis subassembly inserts surfaces to define a flush median with an optionalNew Jersey Barrier.

The pavement structure follows the standards described in “Pavement Structureof Paved Sections" in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.

210 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 219: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the center of median on the finish grade surface.This component inserts to the left and right side simultaneously.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Include Barri-er

Selection listTrue shows the New Jersey barrier.False omits the barrier.

Include Barrier

1.2 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width from the median centerline to the left edgeof median

Left Width4.0 ft

1.2 mNumeric, posi-tive

Width from the median centerline to the rightedge of median

Right Width4.0 ft

LINumeric orstring

% slope of the left median surface. The slope canbe a numeric value, or can use the following codes

Left %Slope

MedianFlushWithBarrier | 211

Page 220: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

to match pre-defined superelevation specificationsof the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (left)LO: outside lane slope (left)

LINumeric orstring

% slope of the right median surface. The slopecan be a numeric value, or can use the following

Right %Slope

codes to match pre-defined superelevation speci-fications of the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (right)LO: outside lane slope (right)

0.025mNumeric, posi-tive

Thickness of the Pave1 layer; zero to omitPave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric, posi-tive

Thickness of the Pave2 layer; zero to omit.Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric, posi-tive

Thickness of the base layerBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric, posi-tive

Thickness of the subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft

810 mmNumeric, posi-tive

Height of the barrier at the center of medianDimension A(mm or inches) 32 in

232Numeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramDimension B(mm or inches) 9 in

59 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramDimension C(mm or inches) 2 in

125 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramDimension D(mm or inches) 5 in

212 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 221: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

557 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramDimension E(mm or inches) 22 in

178 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagramDimension F(mm or inches) 7 in

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Left Width and tie the left

AlignmentLeft Width

edge-of-median to an offsetalignment

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Right Width and tie the

AlignmentRight Width

right edge-of-median to anoffset alignment

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the left side of the medianLeft %Slope

Numeric% slope of the right side of the medianRight %Slope

Behavior

The pavement structure links are inserted outward left and right of theattachment point for the given widths and slopes. If the Include Barrier valueis True, a New Jersey barrier is inserted symmetrically about the mediancenterline. If alignments are given as runtime logical assignments for the Leftand Right Widths, the widths are adjusted to tie to the alignment offsets ateach station along the corridor.

MedianFlushWithBarrier | 213

Page 222: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

If the median is in superelevation with a single constant slope across the entiremedian, the top of the barrier is slanted to match the median slope. Otherwisethe top of the barrier remains horizontal. In all cases, the barrier height(Dimension A) is held constant at the centerline of the barrier.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subasssembly displays all pavement links using the widthand depth input parameters at a -2% slope. If Include Barrier is True, the barrieris displayed with the given dimensions.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

All points on the concrete barrierBarrierAll barrier points

Inside edge of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3

Crown of median on finish gradeCrownP2

Edge-of-traveled-way on Pave1ETW_Pave1P4, P6

Crown on Pave1Crown_Pave1P5

Edge-of-traveled-way on Pave2ETW_Pave2P7, P9

Crown on Pave2Crown_Pave2P8

Edge-of-traveled-way on BaseETW_BaseP10, P12

Crown on BaseCrown_BaseP11

214 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 223: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Edge-of-traveled-way on SubbaseETW_SubP13, P15

Crown on SubbaseCrown_SubP14

Top, PaveL1, L2

Pave1L3, L4

Pave2L5, L6

BaseL7, L8

SubbaseL9, L10Datum

BarrierAll barrier links

Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1

Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2

Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3

Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4

Shape inclosed by the barrier.BarrierS5

MedianFlushWithBarrier | 215

Page 224: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

MedianRaisedConstantSlopeThis subassembly inserts links for a constant-slope raised median between twopoints.

Use the MarkPoint subassembly first if the connecting point has not alreadybeen marked.

Attachment

The attachment point may be at either edge of the median finished grade.The marked point must be at the opposite edge.

216 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 225: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringName of the marked point on the median edge oppositethe attachment point

Marked Point

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth of the median cap. May be zero for an unpavedmedian

Depth0.333 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The top of median link is inserted between the attachment point and markedpoint. If a non-zero Depth is given, the bottom of median link is insertedparallel to the top, and vertical links are added to close the shape.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape

Edges of median on finish gradeNoneP1, P2

P3, P4

Top of medianTopL1

Bottom of medianDatumL2

NoneL3, L4

MedianRaisedConstantSlope | 217

Page 226: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape

MedianS1

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly shows the generic layout mode display.

Coding Diagram

MedianRaisedWithCrownThis subassembly inserts links for a constant-slope raised median between twopoints.

Use the MarkPoint subassembly first if the connecting point has not alreadybeen marked.

Attachment

The attachment point may be at either edge of the median finished grade.The marked point must be at the opposite edge.

218 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 227: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringName of the marked point on the median edge oppositethe attachment point

Marked Point

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth of the median cap. May be zero for an unpavedmedian.

Depth0.333 ft

- 2%Numeric orstring

% slope from the median crown toward the attachmentpoint. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the

Slope 1

following codes to match pre-defined superelevationspecifications of the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slopeSI: inside shoulder slope

- 2%Numeric orstring

Slope from the median crown toward the marked point.The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following

Slope 2

codes to match pre-defined superelevation specificationsof the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slopeSI: inside shoulder slope

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

MedianRaisedWithCrown | 219

Page 228: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

The median crown point is calculated by intersecting lines extended betweenthe attachment point and the marked point at the given slopes. If nointersection is found, the median is not inserted. If a non-zero Depth is given,the bottom of the median links are inserted parallel to the top, and verticallinks are added to close the shape.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape

NoneP1, P3

Crown of median on finish gradeMedianP2

NoneP4 - P6

Top of medianTopL1, L2

Bottom of median (if given)DatumL3, L4

MedianS1

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly shows the generic layout mode display.

Coding Diagram

220 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 229: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdgesThis subassembly is used to overlay a four-lane crowned corridor betweengutter flange points on each side, holding to required slope and breakoverranges. This subassembly differs from OverlayBrokenBackOverGutter becauseit overlays between known flange points, rather than overlaying existing gutterto a known profile on the face of curb.

To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right edges. Elevations at these points could come from surfaces orprofiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example, curband gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in as markedpoints, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

Attachment

The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. This istypically at the assembly baseline point. While in layout mode, this pointcoincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finshed grade profilepoint (or baseline marker point) may not be same as crown point, since itsoffset and elevation are computed by edge of pavement data.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

- 18ftNumericDistance between default attachment point to leftedge of pavement. This value is used only if no

Left Flange Offset

alignment or marked point is associated to leftedge.

OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges | 221

Page 230: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

6m and18ft

NumericDistance between default attachment point to rightedge of pavement. This value is used only if no

Right Flange Offset

alignment or marked point is associated to rightedge.

NoneStringProvides existing left edge of pavement offset andelevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL)

Left Flange – MarkedPoint

NoneStringProvides existing right edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTION-AL)

Right Flange –Marked Point

0.1m and0.33ft

NumericMinimum depth of overlay at the quarter pointsand crown.

Minimum Overlay

-1%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.

Inside Min %Slope

-4%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.

Inside Max %Slope

-2%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.

Outside Min %Slope

-6%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.

Outside Max %Slope

4%NumericMaximum breakover, in % slope, at the centerline.Max Breakover

0.05m and0.16ft

NumericMinimum crown deflection at the quarter points.Min Crown Deflec-tions

222 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 231: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Note that if runtime logical assignments are provided, the preceding parameters(namely default offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalProvides left edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.

AlignmentLeft Flange Point

OptionalProvides right edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.

AlignmentRight Flange Point

OptionalProvides left edge of pavement elevation valuewith respect to the attachment point.

ProfileLeft Flange Profile

OptionalProvides right edge of pavement elevationvalue with respect to the attachment point.

ProfileRight Flange Profile

RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-

SurfaceEGTopSurf

vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value (for left/right) respectively.

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the left outside laneLeft Outside Lane%Slope

OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges | 223

Page 232: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the left inside laneLeft Inside Lane %Slope

Numeric% slope of the right outside laneRight Outside Lane%Slope

Numeric% slope of the right inside laneRight Inside Lane%Slope

Behavior

This subassembly uses an iterative process to develop acceptable slopes of theinside and outside links. The initial slopes are set as described below. Eachtime the slope of one link is adjusted, resulting changes in the adjacent linksmay put them out of design tolerances. If a solution is not obtained within10 iterations, a message is displayed and the process is aborted.

Left Edge of Pavement

From the attachment point, the left edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through the "Left Flange Point"logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, it is based on the assigned markedpoint (to Left Flange Point), or (c) if both of these are not provided, then it isbased on the default (Left Flange Offset) offset value.

Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) the Left Flangeprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then the surface elevationis determined from the "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment , or (c) if both of theseare not provided, then the assigned marked point determines the elevation.An error message results if none of these two conditions are met and thecorridor fails to build.

Right Edge of Pavement

From the attachment point, the right edge of pavement point is located basedon: (a) location of alignment through "Right Flange Point" logical assignment,(b) if previous is not provided, based on the assigned marked point (to RightFlange Point), or (c) if both are not provided based on the default (Right FlangeOffset) offset value.

Similarly, elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Right Flangeprofile logical assignment, or (b) if previous is not provided then finding outthe surface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if the

224 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 233: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

previous two are not provided, the assigned marked point determines theelevation. An error message results if none of these two conditions are metand the corridor fails to build.

Crown Point

The Crown Point (offset) is located at halfway between the left edge and rightedge of pavements.

Elevation of the crown point is the sum of "average elevation of left and rightedges" and the "crown height" parameter value.

Bottom of Overlay

Bottom of overlay surface is computed by offsetting the proposed finish grade(Left Edge point to New Crown Point to Right Edge Point) by Overlay depthvalue.

Quarter Points and Crown Point Offsets

The distance between left and right flange points is divided by four to get thetwo quarter points and the crown point. These points elevations are computedby adding the minimum overlay depth to the existing ground at these offsets.

Inside and Outside Pavement Slopes

The resulting overlay links from the previous steps are checked for being withinthe slope tolerances for the outside and inside lanes. If the slopes are withinthe tolerence, then the case is a simple overlay as shown in the followingdiagram.

If overlay links are too steep, or if the Maximum Breakover is exceeded at thecenterline, or the Min Crown Deflection is not obtained, some or all links areflattened to their maximum slopes. Milling surfaces are inserted to hold theminimum overlay depths at the quarter points and centerline.

If overlay links are too shallow, the depth of overlay is increased to achievethe minimum slopes. If this results in too much breakover, further adjustmentsand milling may occur. The following diagram explains overlay with millingcase:

OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges | 225

Page 234: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Special Cases

A positive slope may be allowed on one inside link if the other inside link hasa negative slope, as shown below.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly inserts two lanes at either side of theattachment point. First two edge points will be located based on left/rightoffsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated (in layout mode)by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the"Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, sincethe programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default thecrown point matches with attachment point. Lane slopes in layout mode areequal to the "Min % Outside/Inside Slope" value. Thickness of pavement isequal to Minimum Overlay depth.

226 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 235: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P5

Edges of lane on OverlayETW_OverlayP6, P10

Crown (grade break) on finish gradeCrownP3

Crown (grade break) on OverlayCrown_OverlayP8

Grade break point at quarter pointsLaneBreakP2. P4

Grade break point at quarter points on overlaysurface

LaneBreak_OverlayP7, P9

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2, L3, L4

Overlay surfaceOverlayL5, L6, L7, L8

Overlay areaOverlayS1

Coding Diagram

OverlayBrokenBackOverGuttersThis subassembly is used to overlay a four-lane crowned corridor over gutters(between flow lines) on each side, holding to required slope and breakoverranges. This subassembly differs from OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges because

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 227

Page 236: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

it overlays existing gutters to a known profile on the curb face, rather thanoverlaying between known flange points.

To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right curb face points. Elevations at these points could come fromsurfaces or profiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (forexample, curb and gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could bepassed in as marked points, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

Attachment

The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. Since thesubassembly places lanes on either side of the crown, this attachment pointis typically at the assembly baseline point. While in layout mode this pointcoincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finished grade profilepoint (or baseline marker point) may not be same as crown point, since crownpoint offset and elevation are computed by input data such as left and right(Curb face) offset values.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

6m and18ft

NumericDistance between attachment point and the leftgutter’s curb face. This value is used only if no

Left Gutter Offset

alignment or marked point is associated to leftedge.

6m and18ft

NumericDistance between attachment point and the rightgutter’s curb face. This value is used only if no

Right Gutter Offset

alignment or marked point is associated to rightedge.

228 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 237: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringProvides existing left edge of pavement offset andelevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL)

Left Gutter – MarkedPoint

NoneStringProvides existing right edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTION-AL)

Right Gutter –Marked Point

0.1m and0.33ft

NumericMinimum depth of overlay at the quarter pointsand crown.

Minimum Overlay

-1%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.

Inside Min %Slope

-4%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.

Inside Max %Slope

-2%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.

Outside Min %Slope

-6%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.

Outside Max %Slope

4%NumericMaximum breakover, in % slope, at the centerline.Max Breakover

0.05mand 0.16ft

NumericMinimum crown deflection at the quarter points.Min Crown Deflec-tions

If runtime logical assignments are provided, the parameters above (namelydefault offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 229

Page 238: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalProvides left edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.

AlignmentLeft Gutter Point

OptionalProvides right edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.

AlignmentRight Gutter Point

OptionalProvides left edge of pavement elevation valuewith respect to the attachment point.

ProfileLeft Gutter Profile

OptionalProvides right edge of pavement elevationvalue with respect to the attachment point.

ProfileRight Gutter Profile

RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-

SurfaceEGTopSurf

vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value (for left/right) respectively.

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the left outside laneLeft Outside Lane%Slope

Numeric% slope of the left inside laneLeft Inside Lane %Slope

Numeric% slope of the right outside laneRight Outside Lane%Slope

Numeric% slope of the right inside laneRight Inside Lane%Slope

230 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 239: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

This subassembly uses an iterative pocess to develop acceptable slopes of theinside and outside links. The initial slopes are set as described below. Eachtime the slope of one link is adjusted, resulting changes in the adjacent linksmay put them out of design tolerances. If a solution is not obtained within10 iterations, a message is displayed and the process is aborted.

Left Edge of Pavement

From the attachment point, the left edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Left Gutter Point" logicalassignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it is based on the assigned markedpoint (to Left Gutter Point), or (c) if both of these are not provided, it is basedon the default (Left Gutter Offset) offset value.

Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Left Gutterprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines thesurface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two arenot provided, then the assigned marked point determines the elevation. Anerror messageresults if none of these two conditions are met and the corridorfails to build.

Right Edge of Pavement

From the attachment point, the right edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Right Gutter Point" logicalassignment, (b) if this is not provided, it is based on the assigned marked point(to Right Gutter Point), or (c) if both of these are not provided, then it is basedon the default (Right Gutter Offset) offset value.

Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Right Gutterprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines thesurface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two arenot provided, then the marked point determines the elevation. An errormessage results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor failsto build.

Quarter Points and Crown Point Offsets

The distance between left and right flange points is divided by four to get thetwo quarter points and the crown point. These points elevations are computedby adding the minimum overlay depth to the existing ground at these offsets.

Inside and Outside Pavement Slopes

The resulting overlay links from the previous steps are checked for being withinthe slope tolerances for the outside and inside lanes. If the slopes are within

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 231

Page 240: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

the tolerance, then the case is a simple overlay as show in the followingdiagram.

If the overlay links are too steep, or if the Maximum Breakover is exceeded atthe centerline, or the Min Crown Deflection is not obtained, some or all linksare flattened to their maximum slopes. Milling surfaces are inserted to holdthe minimum overlay depths at the quarter points and centerline.

If overlay links are too shallow, the depth of overlay is increased to achievethe minimum slopes. If this results in too much breakover, further adjustmentsand milling may occur. The following diagram illustrates the overlay withmilling case.

Special Cases

A positive slope may be allowed on one inside link if the other inside link hasa negative slope, as shown below.

232 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 241: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly inserts two lanes at either side of theattachment point. The firts two edge points will be located based on left/rightoffsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated, in layout mode,by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the"Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, sincethe programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default, thecrown point matches the attachment point. Lane slopes in layout mode areequal to the "Min % Outside/Inside Slope" value. Thickness of pavement isequal to Minimum Overlay depth.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P5

Edges of lane on OverlayETW_OverlayP6, P10

Crown (grade break) on finish gradeCrownP3

Crown (grade break) on OverlayCrown_OverlayP8

Grade break point at quarter pointsLaneBreakP2. P4

Grade break point at quarter points on overlaysurface

LaneBreak_OverlayP7, P9

OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 233

Page 242: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2, L3, L4

Overlay surfaceOverlayL5, L6, L7, L8

Overlay areaOverlayS1

Coding Diagram

OverlayCrownBetweenEdgesCreates a simple crowned roadway between two edge-of-pavement points.

To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right edges. Elevations at these points could come from surfaces orprofiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example, curband gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in as markedpoints, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

234 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 243: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. This istypically at the assembly baseline point. While in layout mode, this pointcoincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finshed grade profilepoint (or baseline marker point) may not be the same as crown point sinceits offset and elevation are computed by edge of pavement data.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

3.6m and12ft

NumericDistance between default attachment point to leftedge of pavement. This value is used only if no

Left Edge Offset

alignment or marked point is associated to leftedge.

3.6m and12ft

NumericDistance between default attachment point to rightedge of pavement. This value is used only if no

Right Edge Offset

OverlayCrownBetweenEdges | 235

Page 244: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

alignment or marked point is associated to rightedge.

NoneStringProvides existing left edge of pavement offset andelevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL)

Left Edge – MarkedPoint

NoneStringProvides existing right edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTION-AL)

Right Edge – MarkedPoint

0.1m and0.33ft

NumericHeight from the center point of the string line tothe crown point.

Crown Height

-1%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.

Min %Slope

-3%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.

Max %Slope

0.1m and0.30ft

NumericDepth of overlay above existing finish grades.Overlay Depth

If runtime logical assignments are provided, the preceding parameters (namelydefault offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalProvides left edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.

AlignmentLeft Edge

OptionalProvides right edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.

AlignmentRight Edge

236 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 245: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalProvides left edge of pavement elevation valuewith respect to the attachment point.

ProfileLeft Edge

OptionalProvides right edge of pavement elevationvalue with respect to the attachment point.

ProfileRight Edge

RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-

SurfaceEGTopSurf

vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value (for left/right) respectively.

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric% slope of the left laneLeft Lane %Slope

Numeric% slope of the right laneRight Lane %Slope

Behavior

Left Edge of Pavement

From the attachment point, the left edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Left Edge" logicalassignment, (b) if this is not provided, it is based on the assigned marked point(to Left Edge), or (c) if both of these are not provided, then it is based on thedefault (Left Edge) offset value.

Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Left Edgeprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines thesurface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two arenot provided, the assigned marked pointdetermines the elevation. An errormessage results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor failsto build.

Right Edge of Pavement

From the attachment point, the right edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Right Edge" logical

OverlayCrownBetweenEdges | 237

Page 246: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

assignment, (b) if previous is not provided, based on the assigned markedpoint (to Right Edge), or (c) if both are not provided based on the default(Right Edge) offset value.

Similarly , the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Right Edgeprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines thesurface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two arenot provided, then the assigned marked point determines the elevation. Anerror message results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridorfails to build.

Crown Point

Crown Point (offset) is located at halfway between the left edge and right edgeof pavements.

Elevation of the crown point is the sum of "average elevation of left and rightedges" and the "crown height" parameter value.

Bottom of Overlay

Bottom of overlay surface is computed by offsetting the proposed finish grade(Left Edge point to New Crown Point to Right Edge Point) by Overlay depthvalue.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly inserts one lane each on either side of theattachment point. First two edge points will be located based on left/rightoffsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated (in layout mode)by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the"Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, sincethe programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default thecrown point matches with baseline marker point. Lane slopes in layout modeare equal to the "Min % Slope" value. Thickness of pavement is equal to Overlaydepth.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3

Edges of lane on OverlayETW_OverlayP4, P6

238 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 247: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Crown (grade break) on finish gradeCrownP2

Crown (grade break) on OverlayCrown_OverlayP5

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2

Overlay surfaceOverlayL3, L4

Overlay areaOverlayS1, S2

Coding Diagram

OverlayMedianAsymmetricalWidens an existing divided highway by extending from the travel lane edgesinward over a depressed median, with an asymmetrical barrier at the centerlineto resolve elevation differences. It includes an option to tie the top-of-barrierelevation to a predefined profile.

OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 239

Page 248: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is the center of the base of the barrier.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.100 mNumeric, posi-tive

Thickness of the median overlay layers.Overlay Depth0.3 ft

240 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 249: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0NumericOffset where the median extension layer beginson the left side.

Left Insert Off-set

0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point on the left side.The slope of the left side is calculated on the exist-ing surface between the sample points.

Left Inside Sam-ple Offset

0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point on the left side.The slope of the left side is calculated on the exist-ing surface between the sample points.

Left OutsideSample Offset

0.0NumericOffset where the median extension layer beginson the right side.

Right Insert Off-set

0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point on the right side.The slope of the right side is calculated on theexisting surface between the sample points.

Right InsideSample Offset

0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point on the rightside. The slope of the right side is calculated onthe existing surface between the sample points.

Right OutsideSample Offset

810 mmNumeric, posi-tive

Height of the barrier from the base on the highside of the median to the top of the barrier.

Dimension A(mm or inches) 32 in

232Numeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension B(mm or inches) 9 in

59 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension C(mm or inches) 2 in

125 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension D(mm or inches) 5 in

557 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension E(mm or inches) 22 in

OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 241

Page 250: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

178 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension F(mm or inches) 7 in

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway.

SurfaceExisting Surface

OptionalMay be used to tie the top ofbarrier to the elevation of a

ProfileTop of Barrier

profile. Dimension E may varyto achieve the calculated barrierheight.

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left insert pointfrom an alignment.

AlignmentLeft Insert Offset

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left inside samplepoint from an alignment.

AlignmentLeft Inside Sample Offset

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left outside samplepoint from an alignment.

AlignmentLeft Outside SampleOffset

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right insert pointfrom an alignment.

AlignmentRight Insert Offset

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right inside samplepoint from an alignment.

AlignmentRight Inside Sample Off-set

242 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 251: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right outside sam-ple point from an alignment.

AlignmentRight Outside SampleOffset

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The left and right slopes are calculated between the sample points on eachside. Lines from the cutout points are extended inward at these slopes to thecenterline. The side with the highest elevation at the centerline determinesthe controlling side for the minimum height of the barrier.

The offset of the barrier base on the high side is calculated from the givendimensions. The overlay layer on the high side is extended from the cutoutpoint to this offset.

The overlay layer on the low side is extended from the cutout point to theoffset of the barrier base on the high side.

The barrier is constructed from the base point on the high side, closing to thetop of the overlay layer on the low side, as shown in the diagram.

If a top-of-barrier profile is given as a runtime logical assignment, the heightof the barrier is controlled by the profile. Dimension E may vary to achievethis height.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, a symmetrical median and barrier are drawn with the fixeddimensions shown below. This is the same figure that is drawn in layout modefor the OverlayMedianSymmetrical subassembly.

OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 243

Page 252: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Beginning of median extension at top of overlayETWP1, P5

Beginning of median extension at bottom of over-lay

ETW_OverlayP3, P7

BarrierAll barrier points

Exposed top of overlay layersTopL1, L5

OverlayL2 - L4

OverlayL7 - L9

BarrierAll barrier links

OverlayS1, S2

BarrierS3

244 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 253: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

NOTE The mirror image will apply when the high side of the median is on theright instead of the left.

OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 245

Page 254: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

OverlayMedianSymmetricalWidens an existing divided highway by extending from the travel lane edgesinward over a depressed median, with a symmetrical barrier at the centerline.The median slopes may vary somewhat from the existing slopes to make bothsides meet at the centerline, or to hold the top of the barrier to a profile.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the midpoint of the base of the barrier.

246 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 255: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.100 mNumeric, posi-tive

Thickness of the median overlay layers.Overlay Depth0.3 ft

5%Numeric, posi-tive

Amount that the median % slopes are allowed tovary from the calculated existing Left and Rightslopes.

Slope Tolerance

0.0NumericOffset where the median extension layer beginson the left side.

Left Insert Off-set

0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point on the left side.The slope of the left side is calculated on the exist-ing surface between the sample points.

Left Inside Sam-ple Offset

0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point on the left side.The slope of the left side is calculated on the exist-ing surface between the sample points.

Left OutsideSample Offset

0.0NumericOffset where the median extension layer beginson the right side.

Right Insert Off-set

0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point on the right side.The slope of the right side is calculated on theexisting surface between the sample points.

Right InsideSample Offset

0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point on the rightside. The slope of the right side is calculated onthe existing surface between the sample points.

Right OutsideSample Offset

810 mmNumeric, posi-tive

Height of the barrier from the base on the highside of the median to the top of the barrier.

Dimension A(mm or inches) 32 in

OverlayMedianSymmetrical | 247

Page 256: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

232Numeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension B(mm or inches) 9 in

59 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension C(mm or inches) 2 in

125 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension D(mm or inches) 5 in

557 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension E(mm or inches) 22 in

178 mmNumeric, posi-tive

As shown in diagram.Dimension F(mm or inches) 7 in

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway.

SurfaceExisting Surface

OptionalMay be used to tie the top ofbarrier to the elevation of a

ProfileTop of Barrier

profile. Dimension E may varyto achieve the calculated barrierheight.

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left insert pointfrom an alignment.

AlignmentLeft Insert Offset

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left inside samplepoint from an alignment.

AlignmentLeft Inside Sample Offset

248 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 257: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left outside samplepoint from an alignment.

AlignmentLeft Outside SampleOffset

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right insert pointfrom an alignment.

AlignmentRight Insert Offset

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right inside samplepoint from an alignment.

AlignmentRight Inside Sample Off-set

OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right outside sam-ple point from an alignment.

AlignmentRight Outside SampleOffset

Behavior

The left and right slopes are calculated between the sample points on eachside.

If the Top of Barrier Profile is not given:

■ On each side, a line is calculated that extends from the cutout points tothe centerline using the slopes calculated from the sample points.

■ If the two lines do not meet at equal elevations, the median slope on thehigher side is adjusted down to meet the lower side. The adjustment maynot exceed the Slope Tolerance.

■ If the high side was adjusted by the slope tolerance and the two sides stilldo not meet, the low side is adjusted upward. If the adjustment requiredis greater than the Slope Tolerance, the subassembly exits without storingany points, links, or shapes.

If a Top of Barrier Profile is given as a runtime logical assignment:

■ The left and right barrier base points are calculated from the profileelevation using the given barrier dimensions.

OverlayMedianSymmetrical | 249

Page 258: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

■ The slopes between the barrier base points and the insert points arecalculated.

■ If the difference between the median slope and the existing slope is greaterthan the slope tolerance on either side, the subassembly exits withoutstoring any points, links, or shapes.

■ Otherwise, the median and barrier geometry is added, based on thecalculated barrier base point positions, with the median slopes adjustedto tie to the barrier base points.

Output Parameters

None.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, a median and barrier are drawn with the fixed dimensionsas shown in the following diagram. This is the same figure that is drawn inlayout mode for the OverlayMedianAsymmetrical subassembly.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Beginning of median extension at top of overlayETWP1, P5

250 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 259: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Beginning of median extension at bottom of overlayETW_OverlayP3, P7

BarrierAll barrier points

Exposed top of overlay layersTopL1 - L3

OverlayL4 - L8

BarrierAll barrier links

OverlayS1

BarrierS2

Coding Diagram

OverlayMillAndLevel1This subassembly adds an overlay layer on an existing uncrowned roadwayor ramp, with either a leveling and milling layer added as required.

OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 251

Page 260: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is the edge of overlay on finish grade at the inside trimpoint.

252 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 261: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point. The samplepoints are used to calculate the slope of the exist-ing roadway.

Inside Sample PointOffset

0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point.Outside SamplePoint Offset

0.0NumericOffset of the inside trim point, which defines theinside edge of the overlay layer

Inside Trim Point

0.0NumericOffset of the outside trim point, which defines theoutside edge of the overlay layer

Outside Trim Point

MNumericor String

%Slope of the overlay layer. This can be specifiedwith the following options:

Overlay %Slope (val/ M / S)

Code: Superelevation TypeValue: A numeric % slope value from the inside tooutside edge.M: Match the slope from the Inside Sample Pointto the Outside Sample Point.S: Use the outside lane superelevation slope of thecorridor alignment. If the Inside Points are left ofthe Outside Points, the left side superelevation isused. Otherwise the right side isused.

0.5%Numeric,positive

The value that the Overlay Slope is allowed varyfrom its design value. The slope tolerance is not

%Slope Tolerance

used if the Overlay Slope is given as M (see Behav-ior below for details).

OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 253

Page 262: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Use mini-mum clear-ance

SelectionList

Selects whether to hold the top of overlay at theinside trim point to the corridor profile elevation,or to set the vertical placement of the overlay layerbased on the Minimum Clearance value

Use Profile

0.100 mNumericThe minimum vertical clearance between the exist-ing surface and the bottom of the overlay layer. A

Minimum Clearance(+/-) 0.30 ft

positive value places the bottom-of-overlay linkabove the existing surface, creating a Levelinglayer beneath the overlay. A negative value placesthe bottom-of-overlay link below the existing sur-face, creating a Milling layer that coincides with aportion of the Overlay layer.

0.100 mNumeric,positive

The thickness of the overlay layerOverlay Depth0.30 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway

SurfaceExisting Surface

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Inside Sample Point Offset

AlignmentInside Sample Point Off-set

and tie the point to an offsetalignment

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Outside Sample Point Off-

AlignmentOutside Sample PointOffset

set and tie the point to an offsetalignment

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Inside Trim Point Offset

AlignmentInside Trim Point Offset

and tie the point to an offsetalignment

254 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 263: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Outside Trim Point Offset

AlignmentOutside Trim Point Off-set

and tie the point to an offsetalignment

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericThe slope used for applying the overlay layer%Slope

Behavior

This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the top and bottom of anoverlay layer. The links are inserted from the Inside Trim Offset to the OutsideTrim Offset.

Overlay Slopes

The slope of the Existing Surface is determined between the inside and outsidesample points. The slope of the overlay layer is determined by the followingsteps:

1 If the Overlay %Slope input is given as M, then the overlay slope matchesthe slope from the Inside Sample Point to the Outside Sample point.

2 If the Overlay %Slope is given as S, then the overlay uses the outside lanesuperelevation slope defined for the corridor alignment. The left sideslope is used if the Outside Sample Point is to the left of the Inside SamplePoint, otherwise the right side superelevation slope is used.

3 If a numeric value is given for the Overlay %Slope, the given value isused.

4 If a numeric value or the superelevation slope is used, the overlay slopeis compared to the existing slope between the sample points. If thedifference exceeds the Slope Tolerance value, the design slope is adjustedup or down by the Tolerance value to make it more closely match theexisting slope and minimize the amount of leveling or milling. Slopeadjustment does not occur if the Slope Tolerance is zero.

OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 255

Page 264: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

256 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 265: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Overlay Elevations

The elevations of the overlay points are determined as follows:

1 If the Use Profile value is True, the elevation of the corridor profile is heldat the Inside Trim offset on the top of overlay. The overlay is extendedat the overlay slope to the Outside Trim offset, and a parallel link isinserted for the bottom-of-overlay. Any areas above the existing surfaceand below the bottom-of-overlay are stored as closed shapes with code“Level”. Areas below the existing surface and above the bottom-of-overlayare stored as closed shapes with code “Mill”.

2 If the Use Profile value is False, the bottom-of-overlay link is shiftedvertically to hold to the Minimum Clearance above or below the existingsurface. A positive Minimum Clearance creates a leveling area above theexisting surface and below the bottom-of-overlay. A negative clearancecreates a milling area below the existing surface and above thebottom-of-overlay.

Minimum Clearance Point

The method of determining the point where the Minimum Clearanceappliesis shown in the diagram below.

1 A vertical projection line is established at any arbitrary offset.

OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 257

Page 266: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

2 Each point on the Existing Surface between the two trim points isprojected back to the projection line at the Overlay Slope.

3 The point with the highest elevation on the projection line is the controlpoint for a Minimum Clearance value greater than zero. The one withthe lowest is the control point for a Minimum Clearance value less thanzero.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the overlay layer positioned fromany convenient point of attachment at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Overlay edges on finish gradeEOVP1, P2

Edges of bottom-of-overlayEOV_OverlayP3, P4

Top of overlayTop, PaveL1

Overlay links. Note that L3, L4 go from the bottom-of-overlay to top-of-overlay in both the Levelingand Milling cases

OverlayL2, L3, L4

For the Leveling caseLevelL5, L6For the Milling caseMill

258 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 267: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Area between the top and bottom of overlay. Thisoverlaps the milling area (S3) for the Milling caseas shown in the Coding Diagram below.

OverlayS1

Area above existing surface and below the bottomof overlay (Leveling case)

LevelS2

Area below the existing surface and above thebottom of overlay (Milling case). This area overlaps

MillS3

the Overlay area as shown in the Coding Diagrambelow.

Coding Diagram

OverlayMillAndLevel2This subassembly adds an overlay layer on an existing crowned roadway, witheither a leveling and milling layer added as required.

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 259

Page 268: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is the crown point on the overlay finish grade.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0NumericOffset of the crown point. The crown and samplepoints are used to calculate the left and right slopesof the existing roadway.

Crown Point Offset

0.0NumericOffset of the left sample pointLeft Sample PointOffset

0.0NumericOffset of the right sample pointRight Sample PointOffset

260 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 269: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0NumericOffset of the left trim point, which defines theoutside edge of the overlay layer on the left side

Left Trim Point

0.0NumericOffset of the right trim point, which defines theoutside edge of the overlay layer on the right side

Right Trim Point

MNumericor String

%Slope of the overlay layer from the crown pointto the left trim point. This can be specified withthe following options:

Left Overlay %Slope(val / M / S)

Code: Superelevation TypeValue: A numeric % slope value from the inside tooutside edge.M: Match the slope from the Inside Sample Pointto the Outside Sample Point.S: Use the outside lane superelevation slope of thecorridor alignment.

MNumericor String

%Slope of the overlay layer from the crown pointto the right trim point. This can be specified withthe same options used for the left side.

Right Overlay%Slope(val / M / S)

0.5%Numeric,positive

The value that the Overlay Slopes are allowed varyfrom their design values. The slope tolerance is not

%Slope Tolerance

used if the Overlay Slope is given as M (see Behav-ior below for details).

Use mini-mum clear-ance

SelectionList

Selects whether to hold the top of overlay at theinside trim point to the corridor profile elevation,or to set the vertical placement of the overlay layerbased on the Minimum Clearance value

Use Profile

0.100 mNumericThe minimum vertical clearance between the exist-ing surface and the bottom of the overlay layer. A

Minimum Clearance(+/-) 0.30 ft

positive value places the bottom-of-overlay linkabove the existing surface, creating a Levelinglayer beneath the overlay. A negative value placesthe bottom-of-overlay link below the existing sur-

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 261

Page 270: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

face, creating a Milling layer that coincides with aportion of the Overlay layer.

0.100 mNumeric,positive

The thickness of the overlay layerOverlay Depth0.30 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the Surface defining the existingroadway

SurfaceExisting Surface

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed CrownPoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment

AlignmentCrown Point Offset

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Left SamplePoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment

AlignmentLeft Sample Point Offset

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Right Sam-ple Point Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment

AlignmentRight Sample Point Off-set

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Left TrimPoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment

AlignmentLeft Trim Point Offset

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Right TrimPoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment

AlignmentRight Trim Point Offset

262 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 271: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericThe slope used for applying the overlay layer on the leftside

Left Overlay %Slope

NumericThe slope used for applying the overlay layer on the rightside

Right Overlay %Slope

Behavior

This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the top and bottom of anoverlay layer on each side that join at the crown point. The links are insertedfrom the Crown Point Offset to the Left and Right Trim Offsets.

Overlay Slopes

The slope of the Existing Surface on each side is determined betweenthe crownand sample points. The slopes of the overlay layers aredetermined by thefollowing steps:

1 If the Overlay %Slope input is given as M, then the overlay slope matchesthe slope from the Crown Point to the Sample point.

2 If the Overlay %Slope is given as S, then the overlay uses the outside lanesuperelevation slope defined for the corridor alignment.

3 If a numeric value is given for the Overlay %Slope, the given value isused.

4 If a numeric value or the superelevation slope is used, the overlay slopeis compared to the existing slope between the sample points. If thedifference exceeds the Slope Tolerance value, the design slope is adjustedup or down by the Tolerance value to make it more closely match theexisting slope and minimize the amount of leveling or milling. Slopeadjustment does not occur if the Slope Tolerance is zero.

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 263

Page 272: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

264 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 273: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 265

Page 274: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Overlay Elevations

The elevations of the overlay points are determined as follows:

1 If the Use Profile value is True, the elevation of the corridor profile is heldat the Crown Point offset on the top of overlay. The overlay is extendedto each side at the overlay slopes to the Left and Right Trim offsets, andparallel links are inserted for the bottom-of-overlay. Any areas above theexisting surface and below the bottom-of-overlay are stored as closedshapes with code “Level”. Areas below the existing surface and above thebottom-of-overlay are stored as closed shapes with code “Mill”.

2 If the Use Profile value is False, the bottom-of-overlay link on each sideis shifted vertically to hold to the Minimum Clearance above or belowthe existing surface. A positive Minimum Clearance creates a levelingarea above the existing surface and below the bottom-of-overlay. Anegative clearance creates a milling area below the existing surface andabove the bottom-of-overlay. The overlay links on one side are shiftedvertically so that the links meet at the crown point.

Minimum Clearance Point

266 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 275: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

The method of determining the point where the Minimum Clearance appliesis shown in the diagram below.

1 A vertical projection line is established at any arbitrary offset.

2 Each point on the Existing Surface between the two trim points isprojected back to the projection line at the Overlay Slope.

3 The point with the highest elevation on the projection line is the controlpoint for a Minimum Clearance value greater than zero. The one withthe lowest is the control point for a Minimum Clearance value less thanzero.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the overlay layer positioned fromany convenient point of attachment at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Crown on finish gradeCrownP1

Overlay edges on finish gradeEOVP2, P3

Crown on bottom-of-overlayCrown_OverlayP4

Edges of bottom-of-overlayEOV_OverlayP5, P6

OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 267

Page 276: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Top of overlayTop, PaveL1, L2

Overlay links. Note that L5, L6 go from the bot-tom-of-overlay to top-of-overlay in both the Level-ing and Milling cases.

OverlayL3 – L6

Verticals from existing surface to bottom-of-over-lay:

LevelMill

L7, L8

Level - For the Leveling case.Mill - For the Milling case.

Area between the top and bottom of overlay. Thisoverlaps the milling area (S3) for the Milling caseas shown below.

OverlayS1

Area above existing surface and below the bottomof overlay (Leveling case)

LevelS2

Area below the existing surface and above thebottom of overlay (Milling case). This area overlapsthe Overlay area as shown below.

MillS3

268 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 277: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

OverlayParabolicThis subassembly inserts parabolic travel lanes, to represent finish grade,pavement, and subbase for urban, parabolic lanes between known flangepoints. The parabolic shape is simulated by a series of short, straight-line links.

To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right flange points. Elevations at these points could come from surfacesor profiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example,curb and gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in asmarked points, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

OverlayParabolic | 269

Page 278: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. Since thesubassembly places lanes on either side of the crown, this attachment pointis typically at the assembly baseline point. While in the layout mode this pointcoincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finished grade profilepoint (or baseline marker point) may not be the same as crown point, as crownpoint offset and elevation are computed by input data such as left and right(flange point) offset values.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

7.2mNumericDistance between attachment point to left edgeof pavement. This value is used only if no align-ment or marked point is associated to left edge.

Left Flange Offset24.0ft

7.2mNumericDistance between attachment point to right edgeof pavement. This value is used only if no align-ment or marked point is associated to right edge.

Right Flange Offset24.0ft

NoneStringTo provide existing left edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly (OPTIONAL)

Left Flange – MarkedPoint

NoneStringTo provide existing right edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly (OPTIONAL)

Right Flange –Marked Point

270 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 279: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.10mNumeric,positive

Height from the center point of the string line tothe crown of road.

Crown Height0.3333ft

-1%NumericMinimum % cross slope allowed for the lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.

Min %Slope

-4%NumericMaximum % cross slope allowed for the lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.

Max %Slope

0.025mNumeric,positive

Depth of overlay below the finish grade.Overlay Depth0.083ft

8Numeric,positive,even

Number of straight line increments simulating theparabolic shape

No. Increments

If runtime logical assignments are provided, the parameters above (namelydefault offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalThis will provide left edge of pavement offsetvalue with respect to the attachment point

AlignmentLeft Gutter Point

OptionalThis will provide right edge of pavement offsetvalue with respect to the attachment point

AlignmentRight Gutter Point

OptionalThis will provide left edge of pavement eleva-tion value with respect to the attachmentpoint

ProfileLeft Gutter Profile

OptionalThis will provide right edge of pavement ele-vation value with respect to the attachmentpoint

ProfileRight Gutter Profile

OverlayParabolic | 271

Page 280: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-

SurfaceEGTopSurf

vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value (for left/right) respectively

Output Parameters

None

Behavior

Initial attachment point is just a place holder (and more applicable in layoutmode). First two points to establish are left and right edges, whose offsets andelevations are determined based on input parameters.

Then a string line is defined by joining the left and right flange points (whichare newly established edges of travelways). This string line is divided by"number of increments" parameter and middle one is taken as "crown point"offset. Crown point elevation is established by adding the 'crown height"parameter to the elevation of midpoint on the string line.

The ordinates of the parabolic curve at other tesselated points are calculatedusing standard vertical curve equations, based on the assumption that thestring line is horizontal. Straight line links are added to connect the ordinatepoints in a series (from left edge to crown point to right edge) to define thefinish grade. A parallel surface is inserted at the overlay depth below this finishgrade.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly inserts equal number (based on inputparameter) lanes on either side of the attachment point. First two edge pointswill be located based on left/right offsets. These left and right point elevationsare calculated (in layout mode) by subtracting crown height from the ordinateof attachment point. Then the "Crown Point" is located halfway between thesetwo points. However, since the programatic defaults are the same for both leftand right, by default the crown point matches with attachment point. Laneslopes are accepted as they come in. Thickness of pavement is equal to overlaydepth.

272 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 281: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Outside edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3

Outside edges of lane on the Base surfaceETW_OverlayP4, P6

Crown point on finish gradeCrownP2

Crown point on Pave1Crown_OverlayP5

Links connecting all points on finish gradeTop, PaveL1 to Ln

Links connecting all points on bottom of overlaysurface

OverlayL(n+1) to L(2n)

Area between finish grade and Pave1OverlayS1

Coding Diagram

OverlayWidenMatchSlope1This subassembly overlays one side of an existing road, and adds one or moretravel lanes to the edge while matching the existing lane slopes.

OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 | 273

Page 282: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the top of the overlay layer.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0NumericOffset of the sample point, which may be anywherebetween the insertion point and the next slope

Sample Point Off-set

break on the existing road surface. Typical Samplepoint locations are the crown of road, or the oppo-site edge-of-traveled-way if the road is not crowned.

0.0NumericOffset of the insertion point, which is typically atthe edge-of-traveled-way where the widening is tooccur

Insert Point Offset

274 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 283: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth of the overlay above the existing finish gradeOverlay Depth0.30 ft

3.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the widening laneWidth12.0 ft

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Thickness of the Pave1 layer for the lane widening;zero to omit

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Thickness of the Pave2 layer for the lane widening;zero to omit

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Thickness of the base layer for the lane wideningBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric,positive

Thickness of the subbase layer for the lane wideningSubbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the Surface defining the existingroadway

SurfaceExisting Surface

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed SamplePoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment

AlignmentSample Point Offset

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed InsertPoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment

AlignmentInsert Point Offset

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed widen-ing lane Width and tie the edge-of-lane toan offset alignment

AlignmentWidth

OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 | 275

Page 284: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericThe calculated slope on the existing surface from the SamplePoint to the Insert Point

%Slope

Behavior

The elevations of the Sample Point and Insert Point on the Existing Surfaceare determined, and the slope is calculated from the sample point to the insertpoint. An overlay layer is added above the existing lane at the same slope forthe given Overlay Depth. A closed overlay shape is created by superimposingone or more links over the existing grade.The widening lane is attachedoutward from the overlay at the Insert Offset using the calculated slope.

The pavement layers are closed with vertical links at each end. A single vertticallink is also placed from the inside edge of Subbase to the existing surface.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly is attached to any convenient point. Theoverlay layer is shown at a uniform depth for a width of 3.6 meters or 12 ftat a slope of -2%. The widening lane extends from the edge-of-overlay for thegiven width and depths at a -2% slope.

In modeling mode the shapes adjust to the actual conditions determined bythe Sample Point, Insert Point, and Existing Surface.

276 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 285: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Outside edge of widening lane on finish gradeETWP5

Outside edge of widening lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P7

Outside edge of widening lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P9

Outside edge of widening lane on BaseETW_BaseP11

Outside edge of widening lane on SubbaseETW_SubP13

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L5

Superimposed over links on the Existing Surface.Note that there may be more than a single linkbetween points P3 and P4.

OverlayL2

Pave1L6

Pave2L7

BaseL8

Subbase, DatumL9

DatumL10

Area between the overlay and existing laneOverlayS1

Pave1S2

Pave2S3

BaseS4

OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 | 277

Page 286: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

SubbaseS5

Coding Diagram

OverlayWidenMatchSlope2This subassembly overlays an existing uncrowned road, and adds one or moretravel lanes to the left and right edges while matching the existing lane slope.

278 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 287: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edges of the finish grade on the wideninglanes.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0NumericOffset of the Left Insert Point. This is the point wherethe widening lane on the left begins, and is typicallyat the existing left edge-of-traveled-way.

Left Insert PointOffset

0.0NumericOffset of the Right Insert Point, typically at the exist-ing right edge-of-traveled way

Right Insert PointOffset

OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 | 279

Page 288: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth of the overlay above the existing finish gradeOverlay Depth0.30 ft

3.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the left widening laneLeft Width12.0 ft

3.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the right widening laneRight Width12.0 ft

0.025mNumeric,positive

Depth between finish grade and Pave1Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Depth between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth between Pave2 and BaseBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric,positive

Depth between the subbase and the top of the baselayer

Subbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway

SurfaceExisting Surface

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Left Insert Point Offset and

AlignmentLeft Insert Point Offset

tie the point to an offset align-ment

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Right Insert Point Offset

AlignmentRight Insert Point Offset

and tie the point to an offsetalignment

280 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 289: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Left Width and tie the

AlignmentLeft Width

edge-of-lane to an offset align-ment

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Right Width and tie the

AlignmentRight Width

edge-of-lane to an offset align-ment

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericThe calculated slope on the existing surface from theSample Point to the Insert Point

%Slope

Behavior

The elevations of the Left and Right Insert Points on the Existing Surface aredetermined, and the slope is calculated between the two points. If a non-zeroOverlay Depth is given, an overlay layer is added above the existing lane atthe calculated slope. A closed overlay shape is created by superimposing oneor more links over the existing grade. The widening lanes are inserted outwardfrom the overlay edges for the given widths at calculated slope.

If the Overlay Depth is given as zero, the widening lanes are inserted outwardfrom the insert offsets at the existing grade.

The pavement layers are closed with vertical links at each end. A single vertticallink is also placed from the inside edge of Subbase to the existing surface.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly is attached to any convenient point. Theoverlay layer is shown at a uniform depth for a width of 4.2 meters or 14 feetat a slope of -2%. The widening lanes extend from the edges-of-overlay at thegiven widths and depths at the -2% slope.

OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 | 281

Page 290: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

In modeling mode the subassembly adjusts to the positions and slopesdetermined by the Insert Points and the Existing Surface.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Outside edge of widening lane on finish gradeETWP5

Outside edge of widening lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P7

Outside edge of widening lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P9

Outside edge of widening lane on BaseETW_BaseP11

Outside edge of widening lane on SubbaseETW_SubP13

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L5

Superimposed over links on the Existing Surface.Note that there may be more than a single linkbetween points P3 and P4.

OverlayL2

282 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 291: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Pave1L6

Pave2L7

BaseL8

Subbase, DatumL9

DatumL10

Area between the overlay and existing laneOverlayS1

Pave1S2

Pave2S3

BaseS4

SubbaseS5

OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 | 283

Page 292: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

OverlayWidenWithSuper1This subassembly overlays one side of an existing road, and adds one or moretravel lanes to the edge using the superelevation slope defined for the outsidetravel lane.

284 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 293: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the top of the overlay layer ifthe Overlay Depth is non-zero, or at the inside edge on finish grade of thewidening lane if the Overlay Depth is zero.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.0NumericOffset of the control point, which defines the begin-ning of the pavement overlay layer

Control Point Offset

0.0NumericOffset of the insertion point of the widening lane,which is typically at the existing edge-of-traveled-way

Insert Point Offset

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth of the overlay above the existing finish gradeat the control point.

Overlay Depth0.30 ft

OverlayWidenWithSuper1 | 285

Page 294: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

3.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the widening laneWidth12.0 ft

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Thickness of the Pave1 layer for the lane widening;zero to omit

Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Thickness of the Pave2 layer for the lane widening;zero to omit

Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Thickness of the base layer for the lane wideningBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumeric,positive

Thickness of the subbase layer for the lane wideningSubbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway

SurfaceExisting Surface

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Control Point Offset and

AlignmentControl Point Offset

tie the point to an offset align-ment

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Insert Point Offset and tiethe point to an offset alignment

AlignmentInsert Point Offset

OptionalMay be used to override thefixed widening lane Width and

AlignmentWidth

tie the edge-of-lane to an offsetalignment

286 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 295: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericThe calculated slope on the existing surface from the SamplePoint to the Insert Point

%Slope

Behavior

The outside lane superelevation is obtained from the alignment properties ofthe current control alignment, and the elevation on the Existing Surface atthe Control Point Offset is determined.

If a non-zero Overlay Depth is given, the overlay depth is applied at the controlpoint. The top of the overlay layer extends to the Insert Point Offset at thesuperelevation slope, and the overlay shape is closed by superimposing linksover the Existing Surface between the control and insert points and addingvertical links at each end. The widening lane is extended outward at thesuperelevation slope for the given Width from the edge of the overlay surface.

If the Overlay Depth is zero, the widening lane extends outward from theInsert Point Offset on the Existing Surface at the superelevation slope for thegiven Width.

The pavement layers are closed with vertical links at each end. A single vertticallink is also placed from the inside edge of Subbase to the existing surface.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly may be attached to any convenient point.The overlay layer is shown at a uniform depth, with a width of 3.6 meters or12 feet and extended at a slope of -2%. If the Overlay Depth is zero, the overlayis shown as a single link. The widening lane extends from the edge-of-overlayat a slope of -2%.

When used in corridor modeling mode, the shapes adjust to the selectedcontrol point, insert point, superelevation slope, and existing surface.

OverlayWidenWithSuper1 | 287

Page 296: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Outside edge of widening lane on finish gradeETWP5

Outside edge of widening lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P7

Outside edge of widening lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P9

Outside edge of widening lane on BaseETW_BaseP11

Outside edge of widening lane on SubbaseETW_SubP13

Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L5

Superimposed over links on the Existing Surface.Note that there may be more than a single linkbetween points P3 and P4.

OverlayL2

Pave1L6

288 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 297: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Pave2L7

BaseL8

Subbase, DatumL9

DatumL10

Area between the overlay and existing lane.OverlayS1

Pave1S2

Pave2S3

BaseS4

SubbaseS5

Coding Diagram

OverlayWidenWithSuper1 | 289

Page 298: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp
Page 299: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Subassembly Reference(continued)

In this chapter

■ RailSingle

■ RetainWallTapered

■ RetainWallTaperedWide

■ RetainWallTieToDitch

■ RetainWallToLowSide

■ RetainWallVertical

■ ShapeTrapezoidal

■ ShoulderExtendAll

■ ShoulderExtendSubbase

■ ShoulderVerticalSubbase

■ SideDitch

■ SideDitchUShape

■ SideDitchWithLid

■ SnapToMarkedPoint

■ StrippingPavement

■ StrippingTopSoil

■ TrenchWithPipe

■ TrenchPipe1

■ UrbanCurbGutterGeneral

3

291

Page 300: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

■ UrbanCurbGutterValley1

■ UrbanCurbGutterValley2

■ UrbanCurbGutterValley3

■ UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1

■ UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2

■ UrbanReplaceSidewalk

■ UrbanSidewalk

292 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 301: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

RailSingleThis subassembly inserts the rails, sleeper, ballast, and sub-ballast for asingle-track railroad.

It should be followed with a Daylight subassembly on the left and right sidesto close to existing ground in cut and fill situations.

NOTE This subassembly is designed for visualization and to demonstrate the useof corridor modeling for rail applications. It is not intended for actual engineeringproduction work.

Attachment

The attachment point is at a distance equal to the rail height above thecenterline of the sleeper.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0 (%)Numeric% slope of the roadbedRail % Slope

1.435 mNumeric,positive

Width of the rail gauge from inside-to-in-side rail. The rails are placed symetricallyabout the centerline alignment.

Gauge Width4.7083 ft (4’ 8-1/2”)

RailSingle | 293

Page 302: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

2.4 mNumeric,positive

Width of the sleeper, placed symetricallyabout the centerline

Sleeper Width8.0 ft

0.200 mNumeric,positive

Height of the sleeperSleeper Height0.67 ft

3.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the top of the ballast layer, placedsymetrically about the centerline

Ballast Width12.0 ft

0.3Numeric,positive

Thickness of the ballast layer from finishgrade

Ballast Depth1.0 ft

2 (: 1)Numeric,positive

Side slope (x : 1) of the ballast layerBallast Side Slope

6.6 mNumeric,positive

Width of the top of the sub-ballast layer,placed symetrically about the centerline

Sub-ballast Width22.0 ft

0.3Numeric,positive

Thickness of the sub-ballast layerSub-ballast Depth1.0 ft

2 (: 1)Numeric,positive

Side slope of the sub-ballast layerSub-ballast SideSlope

Runtime Logical Assignments (optional)

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The links for the rails, sleeper, ballast, and sub-ballast are calculated and placedbased on the input parameter values provided. If the Rail %Slope is non-zero,the corridor profile elevation is held at the center of the rail on the low side.

294 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 303: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

The finish grade, sleeper, ballast, and sub-ballast links are maintained at theRail %Slope.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the finishgrade, ballast, sub-ballast, and side slopes.

Constants

DescriptionConstantPoint, Link, orShape

Edge of ballast shoulderEBSP1, P4

Edge of sleeperESLP2, P3

Daylight point for the ballast layerDaylight_BallastP8,P9

Edge of subballast shoulderESBSP7, P10

RailSingle | 295

Page 304: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionConstantPoint, Link, orShape

Daylight point for the sub-ballast layerDaylight_SubballastP11, P12

Numbered sequentially for longitudinal connection(not shown in diagram)

R1, R2, ..…All rail points

Finish grade on ballast layerTop, BallastL1, L3

Finish grade on top-of-sleeperTop, SleeperL2

Sides of sleeperSleeperL4, L6

Sideslopes on ballast layer (side slopes)Top, BallastL7, L8

Bottom of ballastBallastL10

Finish grade on subballast layerTop, SubballastL9, L11, L12,L14

Bottom of subballastSubballastL13

SleeperS1

BallastS2

SubballastS3

Not shown in diagramRailRail shapes

296 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 305: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

RetainWallTaperedThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with one tapered side andan optional key at the bottom.

RetainWallTapered | 297

Page 306: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

298 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 307: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is incut condition or fill. If it is in fill, the attachment point is near the top of theretaining wall. If it is inserted in cut condition, the attachment point is nearthe footing.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side thesubassembly is inserted to-wards.

Side

0.958 ftNumericSpecifies the width of thewall at the top

Wall Top Width0.292 m

The distance between thetop-of-the wall and the

Top Height

hook in fill or the new hookin cut.

The depth of cover from thetop-of-footing to the finish

Footing Cover

grade line on the back sideof the wall in fill or to thehook when in cut.

YesBooleanSpecies to add an optionalkey below the footing

Key

Wall height is determined from the top of the footing to the insertion pointof the ground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Wall batteredslope, width of the footing, offset of wall vertical face, optional key dimensions,and the location of the key center, are all functions of the wall height.

RetainWallTapered | 299

Page 308: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed wall heightand tie to a profile.

ProfileWall Height

RequiredExisting ground surface name to determineretaining wall in cut or fill.

SurfaceTarget Surface

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly can be inserted on either the left or the right sides. Theattachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachmentpoint is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of thewall, at a distance of Top Height below the top of the wall. In cut, theattachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the insideface, at a distance of Footing Cover above the top-of-footing. The wall heightis determined from the Wall Height or Profile input.

In fill, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway. In cut, thesloping wall face is away from the roadway. If the Key option is set to No,then the base of the footing is a single horizontal link. If the Key option isused, links to define the optional Key are inserted.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

RW_FrontP1

RW_TopP2

300 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 309: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

RW_BackP3

RW_HingeP14

Could be used as breaklines in building da-tum surface

RW_InsideP12

Could be used as breaklines in building da-tum surface

RW_OutsideP5

Top, WallL1, L2, L3

L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;DatumL4,L5,L6

RWallS1

Coding Diagram

Fill Condition

Cut Condition

RetainWallTapered | 301

Page 310: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

RetainWallTaperedWideThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with one side tapered, andis typically used if walls are 5.5 meters or higher.

302 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 311: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

This subassembly also adds an optional key at the bottom.

Attachment

The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is in acut or fill condition. If it is in a fill condition, the attachment point is nearthe top of the retaining wall. In a cut condition, the attachment point is nearthe footing.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassembly is in-serted towards.

Side

1.476 ftNumericSpecifies the width of the wall at the topWall Top Width0.450 m

RetainWallTaperedWide | 303

Page 312: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

the distance between the top-of-the walland the hook in fill or the new hook in cut.

Top Height

The depth of cover from the top-of-footingto the finish grade line on the back side ofthe wall in fill or to the hook when in cut.

Footing Cover

YesBooleanSpecies to add an optional key below thefooting

Key

Wall height is determined from the top of the footing to the attachment pointof ground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Width and depthof the footing are measured as a function of the wall height. Wall vertical faceis located at ¼ of the footing width, and the bottom of battered slope is at300 mm from the other edge. Optional key is locate right at the center of thefooting at 300mm deep and 600mm wide.

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed wallheight and tie to a profile. Assignedprofile corresponds to

ProfileWall Height

RequiredExisting ground surface name to deter-mine retaining wall in cut or fill.

SurfaceTarget Surface

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly can be inserted on either the left or the right sides. Theattachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachmentpoint is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of thewall, at a distance below the top of the wall equal to the Top Height parameter.

304 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 313: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

In a cut condition, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finishgrade intersects the inside face, above the top-of-footing at a distance equalto the Footing Cover parameter. The wall height is determined from the WallHeight or Profile input.

In a fill condition, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway.In a cut condition, the sloping wall face is away from the roadway, towardthe earth being retained. If the Key option is set to No, then the base of thefooting is a single horizontal link. If the Key option is used, links to definethe optional key are created.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

RW_FrontP1

RW_TopP2

RW_BackP3

RW_HingeP14

Could be used as breaklines in build-ing datum surface

RW_InsideP12

Could be used as breaklines in build-ing datum surface

RW_OutsideP5

L1=P1 to P2; L2= P2 to P3; L3 = P3to P14;

Top, WallL1, L2, L3

L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10to 11;

DatumL4,L5,L6

RetainWallTaperedWide | 305

Page 314: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

RWallS1

Coding Diagram

Fill Condition

Cut Condition

306 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 315: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

RetainWallTieToDitchThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with a paved shoulder andwith special tie slopes to tie to an existing ditch.

This subassembly can place an optional barrier on the top of the wall and anoptional key below the footing.

Attachment

The attachment point is on the inside of the shoulder.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassem-bly is inserted towards.

Side

RetainWallTieToDitch | 307

Page 316: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric, PositiveWidth of the shoulder from the at-tachment point

Shoulder Width

Numeric, PositiveDepth of Pave 1, Enter ZERO if noPave 1

Pave 1 Depth

Numeric, PositiveDepth of Pave 2, Enter ZERO if noPave 2

Pave 2 Depth

Depth of base layerBase Depth

Depth of the subgrade layerSubgrade Depth

0.958 ftNumericSpecifies the width of the wall.Wall Width0.292 m

The depth of cover from the top-of-footing to the finish grade line

Footing Cover

on the back side of the wall in fillor to the hook when in cut.

YesBooleanSpecies to add an optional key be-low the footing

Key

YesString, (a) Yes, (b) NoSpecifies to use a barrier on the topof the wall

Use Barrier

Numeric, PositiveWidth of the walkway link on thetie slope

Walk Width

NumericSlope of the walkway link(grade/slope type)

Walk Slope

NumericSlope of the fill link from the walk-way to the tie point (Slope type)

Fill Slope

308 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 317: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric, PositiveWidth from ditch point to the tiepoint (to existing inside edge ofthe ditch)

Toe Width

Wall height is determined from top of the footing to attachment point ofground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Wall battered slope,width of the footing, offset of wall vertical face, optional key dimensions, andthe location of the key center are all functions of the wall height.

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the shoul-der slope by tieing to a profile.

ProfileEdge of Shoulder

RequiredInside edge of ditch profile used tolocate Tie Point

AlignmentDitch Offset

RequiredExisting ground surface to tie in withrespect to specified ditch and toewidth

SurfaceTie-in Surface

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly can be inserted either on the left or the right sides. Theattachment point is assumed to be at the design edge-of-travel-way, fromwhere the paved shoulders will be drawn as specified by this subassembly.

The top-of-footing elevation is determined by working inwards from the TiePoint to the inside edge of walkway, then subtracting the Footing Cover fromthe tie link at the offset of the outside footing corner. The height of wall (H)is calculated between the Outside Edge of the Shoulder and the top of footing.If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a single horizontallink. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key are inserted.

RetainWallTieToDitch | 309

Page 318: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Note: A very small gap (0.001 for m) is left between the pavement layers andthe inside face of wall. This is to facilitate material analysis using the quantitytakeoff feature, as shown in the detail below.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

DaylightP2

Edge of the walk widthWalk_EdgeP3

RW_HingeP14

Could be used as breaklines in buildingdatum surface

RW_InsideP12

Could be used as breaklines in buildingdatum surface

RW_OutsideP5

TopL1, L2, L3

WallL2, L3

Bottom of the footingFootingL4,L5,L6

310 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 319: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Pave1L7

Pave2L8

Base, DatumL9

RWallS1

BarrierS2

Pave1S3

Pave2S4

BaseS5

Coding Diagram

RetainWallTieToDitch | 311

Page 320: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

RetainWallToLowSideThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with one tapered side.

312 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 321: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

The wall is pushed to a side so that all of the footing is on the high fill side.This subassembly also adds an optional key at the bottom.

Attachment

The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is incut condition or fill. If it is in fill, the attachment point is near the top of theretaining wall. The attachment point is near the footing if it is inserted in cutcondition.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassemblyis inserted towards.

Side

0.958 ftNumericSpecifies the width of the wall at thetop

Wall Top Width0.292 m

RetainWallToLowSide | 313

Page 322: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

the distance between the top-of-thewall and the hook in fill or the newhook in cut.

Top Height

The depth of cover from the top-of-footing to the finish grade line on the

Footing Cover

back side of the wall in fill or to thehook when in cut.

YesBooleanSpecies to add an optional key belowthe footing

Key

Wall height is determined from top of the footing to attachment point ofground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Wall battered slope,width of the footing, optional key dimensions, and the location of the keycenter, are all functions of the wall height.

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed wallheight and tie to a profile. Assignedprofile corresponds to

ProfileWall Height

RequiredExisting ground surface name to deter-mine retaining wall in cut or fill.

SurfaceTarget Surface

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly can be inserted on either left or right sides. The attachmentpoint is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachment point isassumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of the wall,below the top of the wall, at a distance equal to the Top Height parameter. In

314 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 323: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

cut, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersectsthe inside face, above the top-of-footing, at a distance equal to the FootingCover parameter. The wall height is determined from the Wall Height orProfile input. In fill, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway.In cut, the sloping wall face is away from the roadway, towards the earth beingretained. If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a singlehorizontal link. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key areinserted.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

RW_FrontP1

RW_TopP2

RW_BackP3

RW_HingeP14

Could be used as breaklines in building da-tum surface

RW_InsideP12

Could be used as breaklines in building da-tum surface

RW_OutsideP5

L1=P1 to P2; L2= P2 to P3; L3 = P3 to P14;Top, WallL1, L2, L3

L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;DatumL4,L5,L6

RWallS1

RetainWallToLowSide | 315

Page 324: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

Fill Condition

Cut Condition

RetainWallVerticalThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with both sides as verticalwalls (no tapered side), and an optional key at the bottom.

316 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 325: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is incut condition or fill. If it is in fill, the attachment point is near top of theretaining wall. If it is in cut, the attachment point is near the footing.

RetainWallVertical | 317

Page 326: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the sub-assembly is inserted towards.

Side

0.958 ftNumericSpecifies the width of the wall.Wall Width0.292 m

the distance between the top-of-the wall and the hook in fillor the new hook in cut.

Top Height

The depth of cover from thetop-of-footing to the finish

Footing Cover

grade line on the back side ofthe wall in fill or to the hookwhen in cut.

YesBooleanSpecies to add an optional keybelow the footing

Key

Wall height is determined from top of the footing to attachment point ofground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Width of thefooting, offset of wall vertical face, optional key dimensions, and the locationof the key center, are all functions of the wall height.

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed wallheight and tie to a profile. Assignedprofile corresponds to

ProfileWall Height

318 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 327: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredExisting ground surface name to deter-mine retaining wall in cut or fill.

SurfaceTarget Surface

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly can be inserted on either the left or the right sides. Theattachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachmentpoint is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of thewall, below the top of the wall, at a distance equal to the Top Height parameter.In cut, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersectsthe inside face, above the top-of-footing at a distance equal to the FootingCover parameter. The wall height is determined from the Wall Height orProfile input.

In fill, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway. In cut, thesloping wall face is away from the roadway, towards the earth being retained.If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a single horizontallink. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key are inserted.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

RW_FrontP1

RW_TopP2

RW_BackP3

RW_HingeP14

RetainWallVertical | 319

Page 328: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Could be used as breaklines in building datum surfaceRW_InsideP12

Could be used as breaklines in building datum surfaceRW_OutsideP5

L1=P1 to P2; L2= P2 to P3; L3 = P3 to P14;TopL1, L2, L3

L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;DatumL4,L5,L6

RWallS1

Coding Diagram

Fill Condition

Cut Condition

320 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 329: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

ShapeTrapezoidalThis subassembly inserts a trapezoidal shape with flexible parameters andcodes.

This shape can be used as a lane or a shoulder using superelevation parametersfor the slope. The width and outside edge elevation can be calculated basedon an optional alignment and profile. If multiple shapes are stacked, thebottom slope can be used as the top slope of subsequent shapes. If shapes arebutted together, the outside depth can be used as the inside depth of the nextsubassembly. The point, link, and shape codes are left undefined so the shapecan be used to represent different materials in various scenarios.

ShapeTrapezoidal | 321

Page 330: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the shape.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightTrue inserts the shape to the left of the at-tachment point.

Side

False inserts the shoulder to the right of theattachment point.

2.4 mNumericWidth from the attachment point to theshoulder outside point

Width8.0 ft

-2.0%NumericDefault cross slope of the shape surface. Thisvalue is used if the superelevation slope is

Default Cross Slope

not used or is not specified for the baselinealignment.

NoList of options:a.) No, b.) Out-

Specifies to use the slope from the superel-evation specification defined on the baselinealignment.

Use SuperelevationSlope

side Lane Slope,c.) Inside LaneSlope, d.) Out-side ShoulderSlope, e.) InsideShoulder Slope

0.25 mNumeric, positiveDepth at the attachment point.Inside Depth1.0 ft

0.125 mNumeric, positiveDepth opposite the attachment point.Outside Depth0.5 ft

User-defined point codes.Inside Top Codes

322 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 331: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

User-defined point codes.Outside Top Codes

User-defined point codes.Inside Bottom Codes

0.025 mNumeric, positiveUser-defined point codes.Outside BottomCodes 0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric, positiveUser-defined link codes.Bottom Link Codes0.333 ft

0.300 mNumericUser-defined shape codes.Shape Code1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Width andtie the edge-of-shape to an offset aligning.

AlignmentWidth

OptionalMay be used to override the normal shapeslope and tie the top outside shape edge tothe elevation of a profile.

ProfileOutside Elevation

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericSlope of the top linkTop Slope

NumericSlope of the bottom linkBottom Slope

NumericWidth of the shapeWidth

NumericOutside depth of the shapeOutside Depth

ShapeTrapezoidal | 323

Page 332: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

The finish grade of the shape is inserted for the given Width and % Slopeoutward from the attachment point. The bottom link slope is calculated basedon the inside and outside depth of the shape. The point, link, and shape codesare set in the input parameters using the user-defined strings.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shape fora normal crown roadway situation, with default cross slope as the top linkslope value.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodeType

User-defined point codeInside Top CodeP1

User-defined point codeOutside Top CodeP2

User-defined point codeInside Bottom CodeP3

User-defined point codeOutside Bottom CodeP4

User-defined link codeTop Link CodeL1

User-defined link codeBottom Link CodeL4

User-defined shape codeShape CodeS1

324 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 333: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

ShoulderExtendAllThis subassembly inserts a paved shoulder with all pavement, base, and subbaselayers extended to the shoulder daylight slope.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the paved shoulder, which istypically at the outside edge-of-traveled way.

ShoulderExtendAll | 325

Page 334: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightTrue inserts the shoulder to the left of the attach-ment point.

Side

False inserts the shoulder to the right of the at-tachment point.

2.4 mNumericWidth from the attachment point to the shoulderhinge point

Shoulder Width8.0 ft

NoList of op-tions: a.) No,

Specifies to use the slope from the superelevationspecification defined on the baseline alignment.

Use SuperelevationSlope

b.) Outsideshoulderslope, c.) In-side shoulderslope

- 2.0 %NumericDefault cross slope of the shape surface. Thisvalue is used if superelevation slope is not used,or is not specified for the baseline alignment.

Default ShoulderSlope

Hold slopeSelection listSelect whether to hold the daylight link to a fixedslope with variable width, or hold it to a fixedwidth with variable slope

Subbase DaylightType

4 ( : 1)Numeric,positive

The value of the fixed width or fixed slope (x :1) of the daylight link

Daylight Slope /Width

NoList of op-tions: a.) Yes,b.) No

Specifies to use shoulder superelevation slope tosubbase.

Superelevate SubBase

326 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 335: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

- 2.0 %NumericDefault cross slope of the shape surface. Thisvalue is used if superelevation slope is not used,or is not specified for the baseline alignment.

Default SubBaseSlope

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Depth between finish grade and Pave1Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Depth between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth between Pave2 and BaseBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumericDepth of the subbase layer at the attachmentpoint

Subbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed ShoulderWidth and tie the edge-of-shoulder to anoffset alignment

AlignmentShoulder Width

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericSlope of the daylight linkDaylight Slope

NumericOffset of the subgrade daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the subgrade daylight pointDaylight Elevation

ShoulderExtendAll | 327

Page 336: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

The finish grade of the shoulder is inserted for the given Shoulder Width andDefault Shoulder Slope outward from the attachment point. The subbase linkis inserted from the attachment point starting at the Subbase Depth belowthe finish grade.

The shoulder daylight link can be inserted with either a fixed slope (HoldDaylight Slope = True), or a fixed width (Hold Daylight Slope = False). If afixed slope is used, the daylight link is extended from the outside edge of theshoulder until it intersects the subbase link. Otherwise, the subbase layer isextended for the Daylight Width beyond the outside edge of the shoulder,and the daylight link is connected to the end of the subbase.

The Pave1, Pave2, and Base surface links are inserted parallel to the finishgrade at the given depths until they intersect with the shoulder daylight link.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shoulderfor a normal crown roadway situation, using default shoulder and subbasecross slope.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodeType

Edge of paved shoulder, finish gradeEPSP2

Edge of paved shoulder on Pave1EPS_Pave1P4

Edge of paved shoulder on Pave2EPS_Pave2P6

Edge of paved shoulder on BaseEPS_BaseP8

Subbase daylight pointDaylight_SubP10

Paved finish gradeTop, Pave1L1, L3

Top of Pavement2Pave2L4

328 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 337: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodeType

Top of Pavement2Pave2, TopL6

Top of Pavement3Pave3L7

Top of Pavement3Pave3, TopL9

Top of the base courseBaseL10

Top of the base courseBase, TopL12

Bottom of subbaseSubbaseL15

Pave1S1

Pave2S2

BaseS3

SubbaseS4

ShoulderExtendAll | 329

Page 338: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

ShoulderExtendSubbaseThis subassembly inserts a paved shoulder with the subbase layer extendedto a daylight point.

330 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 339: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the paved shoulder, which istypically at the outside edge-of-traveled way.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightTrue inserts the shoulder to the left of the attach-ment point.

Side

False inserts the shouler to the right of the attach-ment point.

2.4 mNumericWidth from the attachment point to the shoulderhinge point

Shoulder Width8.0 ft

SOString% slope of the paved shoulder surface. The slopecan be a numeric value, or can use the following

Shoulder % Slope

codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifi-cations of the baseline alignment:

ShoulderExtendSubbase | 331

Page 340: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Code: Superelevation TypeSI: inside shoulder slopeSO: outside shoulder slope

Hold slopeSelectionlist

Select whether to hold the daylight link to a fixedslope with variable width, or hold it to a fixed widthwith variable slope

Subbase DaylightType

4 ( : 1)Numeric,positive

The value of the fixed width or fixed slope (x : 1) ofthe daylight link

Daylight Slope /Width

SOString% slope of the shoulder subbase surface. The slopecan be a numeric value, or can use the following

Subbase Slope

codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifi-cations of the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeSI: inside shoulder slopeSO: outside shoulder slope

0.0Numeric,positive

Width that the Pave1 layer extends beyond theshoulder hinge point. The bottom of the Pave1 layermay not extend beyond the shoulder sideslope.

Pave1 Extension

0.0Numeric,positive

Width that the Pave2 layer extends beyond theshoulder hinge point. This should be equal to or

Pave2 Extension

greater than the Pave1 Extension.The Pave2 layermay not extend beyond the shoulder sideslope.

0.0Numeric,positive

Width that the Base layer extends beyond theshoulder hinge point. This should be equal to or

Base Extension

greater than the Pave2 Extension. The Base layermay not extend beyond the shoulder sideslope.

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Depth between finish grade and Pave1Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Depth between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

332 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 341: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth between Pave2 and BaseBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumericDepth of the subbase layer at the attachment pointSubbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Shoulder Widthand tie the edge-of-shoulder to an offset align-ment

AlignmentShoulder Width

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

NumericSlope of the daylight linkDaylight Slope

NumericOffset of the subgrade daylight pointDaylight Offset

NumericElevation of the subgrade daylight pointDaylight Elevation

Behavior

The finish grade of the shoulder is inserted for the given Shoulder Width andShoulder % Slope outward from the attachment point, and the subbase linkis inserted from the attachment point offset starting at the Subbase Depthbelow the finish grade.

The shoulder daylight link can be inserted with either a fixed slope (HoldDaylight Slope = True) or a fixed width (Hold Daylight Slope = False). If a fixedslope is used, the daylight link is extended from the outside edge of shoulderuntil it intersects the subbase link. Otherwise the subbase layer is extendedfor the Daylight Width beyond the outside edge of shoulder, and the daylightlink is connected to the end of the subbase.

ShoulderExtendSubbase | 333

Page 342: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

The Pave1, Pave2, and Base surface links are inserted parallel to the finishgrade at the given depths. If the layer Extension values are non-zero, eachlayer is extended for the given distance beyond the shoulder hinge point. Ifa layer extends past the daylight slope, the layer is terminated at the daylightslope intersection. Each layer should be as wide or wider than the one aboveit.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shoulderfor a normal crown roadway situation. If numeric slope values are given forthe Shoulder % Slope and Subbase % Slope, the links are shown at the givenslope values. Otherwise the default slopes of -6% are used.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodeType

Edge of paved shoulder, finish gradeEPSP2

Edge of paved shoulder on Pave1EPS Pave1P4

Edge of paved shoulder on Pave2EPS Pave2P13

Edge of paved shoulder on BaseEPS BaseP7

Subbase daylight pointDaylight SubP11

Paved finish gradeTop, PaveL1, L2

Pave1L4

Pave2L8

BaseL12

SubbaseL15Datum

334 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 343: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodeType

Unpaved finish gradeTop, GravelL14

Unpaved finish gradeAs shown belowOther Links

Pave1S1

Pave2S2

BaseS3

SubbaseS4

ShoulderExtendSubbase | 335

Page 344: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

ShoulderVerticalSubbaseThis subassembly inserts a paved shoulder with the pavement and subbaselayers terminating with a vertical link.

336 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 345: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the paved shoulder, which istypically at the outside edge-of-traveled way.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightTrue inserts the shoulder to the left of the attach-ment point;

Side

False inserts the shoulder to the right of the attach-ment point.

2.4 mNumericWidth from the attachment point to the edge ofpaved shoulder

Paved Width8.0 ft

-6 (%)String% slope of the paved shoulder surface. The slopecan be a numeric value, or can use the following

Paved %Slope

codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifi-cations of the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeSI: inside shoulder slopeSO: outside shoulder slope

1Numeric,1 – 3

Determines when or if the unpaved portion of theshoulder is inserted. Value should be one of thefollowing:

Unpaved Link Treat-ment

Code: Treatment1: Always used2: Used only if shoulder is in cut3: Used only if shoulder is in cut, or is in fill on thehigh side of superelevation.

1.8 mNumeric,positive

Width of the unpaved portion of the shoulder. Setto zero to omit the unpaved link.

Unpaved Width6.0 ft

ShoulderVerticalSubbase | 337

Page 346: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

-6 (%)Numeric,positive

% slope of the unpaved shoulder surfaceUnpaved % Slope

8 (%)Numeric,positive

Maximum breakover between the % slopes of thepaved and unpaved portions on the high side ofsuperelevation

Unpaved MaxBreakover

0.025mNumeric,positive

Depth between finish grade and Pave1Pave1 Depth0.083 ft

0.025 mNumeric,positive

Depth between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2 Depth0.083 ft

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth between Pave2 and BaseBase Depth0.333 ft

0.300 mNumericDepth between Base and SubbaseSubbase Depth1.0 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Paved Widthand tie the edge-of-shoulder to an offset align-ment

AlignmentPaved Width

Conditional;required if

Used to determine if the outside edge of pavedshoulder is in cut or fill. This parameter is notneeded if the Unpaved Link Treatment is 1.

SurfaceDaylight Surface

UnpavedLink Treat-ment is 2 or3.

Output Parameters

None.

338 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 347: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

The links for the shoulder finish grade, Pave1, Pave2, Base and Subbase areinserted outward using the given Paved Width, Paved % Slope, material depths.If the Unpaved Link Treatment is 1, the unpaved shoulder link is insertedunder all conditions. If the Treatment code is 2, the outside edge of the pavedshoulder is checked to determine if it is in cut or fill; the unpaved shoulderlink is inserted only in cut. Treatment code 3 uses the unpaved link in cut, orwhen the paved shoulder link has a positive %slope.The unpaved finish gradelink is inserted at the given Unpaved % Slope, unless the difference betweenthe Paved %Slope and Unpaved %Slope exceeds the Unpaved Max Breakovervalue. In that case the slope of the unpaved link is adjusted to hold thedifference to the given breakover..

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shoulderfor the normal crown roadway condition, based on the input parametersprovided. If a numeric value is given for the Paved %Slope, the paved portionof the shoulder is calculated based on that value. Otherwise the default valueof -6% is used.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape

Edge of paved shoulderEPSP2

Edge of the unpaved shoulderES_UnpavedP3

Edge of paved shoulder on Pave1EPS_Pave1P5

Edge of paved shoulder on Pave2EPS_Pave2P7

Edge of paved shoulder on BaseEPS_BaseP9

Edge of paved shoulder on SubbaseEPS_SubP11

Paved finish gradeTop,L1Pave

ShoulderVerticalSubbase | 339

Page 348: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape

Unpaved finish gradeTop,L2Datum

Pave1L3

Pave2L4

BaseL5

Subbase,L6Datum

DatumL7 – L10

Pave1S1

Pave2S2

BaseS3

SubbaseS4

Coding Diagram

340 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 349: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

SideDitchThe subassembly is used to create a ditch structure with optional backslopeand foreslopes.

Attachment

The attachment point is the innermost point on the grading links precedingthe ditch structure. If grading links are omitted, then the attachment pointis the innermost point on the inside wall of the ditch structure (shown in bluecircle).

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassemblyis inserted.

Side

SideDitch | 341

Page 350: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.45 mNumeric, PositiveInside depth of the ditch.Depth1.5 ft

0.5 mNumeric, PositiveWidth of bottom of the channel.Bottom Width1.5 ft

1:2NumericDitch sideslopesSideslope

0.1 mNumeric, PositiveDepth of the ditch wallDitch Wall Depth0.33 ft

0.15 mNumeric, PositiveNon-lined extension of ditch insideover the attachment point

Inside ExtensionHeight 0.45 ft

1.5 mNumeric, PositiveDitch backfill width on left sideInside BackslopeWidth 5.0 ft

0.1 mNumeric, PositiveWidth of non-lined width beyond theouter point of the ditch structure

Outside BackslopeWidth 0.33 ft

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The subassembly builds the shape for a ditch structure, as shown in the aboveillustration.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly is created outward, starting from theattachment point, as defined using the input parameters.

342 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 351: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Ditch_BackP1, P6

Ditch_FaceP2, P5

Ditch_InP10

Ditch_OutP11

Top, DatumL9, L10, L11

Top, Ditch_TopL1 to L5

Datum, Ditch_BottomL6, L7, L8

Ditch structure shape areaDitchS1

Coding Diagram

SideDitch | 343

Page 352: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

SideDitchUShapeThis subassembly creates a ditch structure with optional bench and backslopeson the inside and the outside of the structure.

Attachment

The attachment point is the innermost point of the optional inside bench. Ifinside benches are omitted, the attachment point is on the innermost pointof the inside wall of the ditch structure.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassemblyis inserted towards.

Side

2.0 ftNumeric, PositiveBottom width of the ditchBottom Width0.6 m

2.0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the ditchDitch Depth

344 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 353: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.6 m

0.45 ftNumeric, PositiveThickness of the inside wall at the topA10.15m

0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveIncreased wall thickness of the insidewall at the bottom

B10.2m

0.5 ftNumeric, PositiveThickness of ditch bottom liningC0.15 m

2.0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the tapered face on the in-side wall

D0.6 m

0.0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the hinge point where thestart of inside bench/backslope linksis located

E10.0 m

1.5 ftNumeric, positiveWidth of the (optional) inside bench.Enter ZERO for no bench

Inside BenchWidth 0.5 m

4%Numeric, Grade typeCross grade of the (optional) insidebench. It is measured away from the

Inside BenchGrade

ditch structure edge, and a positiveslope indicates rising bench from theditch

1.0 ftNumeric, PositiveInside backslope link (optional)width. Enter ZERO value for nobackslope link

F10.3 m

1:1Numeric, Slope typeSlope of the (optional) inside backs-lope link. It is measured away from

G1

the ditch structure, and a positiveslope indicates rising link from thestart point

SideDitchUShape | 345

Page 354: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.45 ftNumeric, PositiveThickness of the inside wall at the topA20.15 m

0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveTapered width of the outside wallB20.2 m

1.0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the hinge point for the startof outside bench/backslope links

E20.3 m

3.0 ftNumeric, positiveWidth of the (optional) outsidebench. Enter ZERO for no bench

Outside BenchWidth 1.0 m

4%Numeric, Grade typeCross grade of the (optional) outsidebench. It is measured away from the

Outside BenchGrade

ditch structure edge, and a positiveslope indicates rising bench from theditch

1.0 ftNumeric, PositiveOutside backslope link (optional)width. Enter ZERO value for nobackslope link

F20.3 m

1:1Numeric, Slope typeSlope of the (optional) outside back-slope link. It is measured away from

G2

the ditch structure, and a positiveslope indicates rising link from thestart point

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

346 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 355: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Output Parameters

Behavior

The subassembly builds the shape for a ditch structure, as shown in theillustration. To omit benching and foreslope links, enter zero for theappropriate width parameters.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Ditch_InP10

Ditch_BackP1, P6

Ditch_FaceP2, P5

Ditch_OutP14

TopL10, L13

If the offsets of P11 is < P8; and P13 is > P9respectively

DatumL10, L13

TopL11

TopL12

TopL1 and L5

Ditch_TopL1 to L5

DatumL8 and L9

SideDitchUShape | 347

Page 356: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

BackfillL10, to L13

Backfill_FaceL6

Ditch structure shape areaDitchS1

Coding Diagram

SideDitchWithLidThis subassembly creates a ditch structure to add to either the left or the rightsides of the assembly.

348 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 357: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Optionally, this subassembly can add daylight links on either side of thestructure.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the innermost point on the grading links precedingthe ditch structure. If the grading links on the inside are omitted, then theattachment point is on the innermost point of the inside wall.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side thesubassembly is inserted to-wards.

Side

2.0ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the ditch on theinside

Ditch Depth0.6m

SideDitchWithLid | 349

Page 358: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

1.0ftNumeric, PositiveBottom width of the ditchBottom Width0.3m

2.0ftNumeric, PositiveDitch opening at the lidTop Width0.6m

0ftNumeric, PositiveGap between the lid sidesand the inside walls

Lid Gap0m

0.45ftNumeric, PositiveTop inside wall thicknessnear the lid

A10.15m

0.6ftNumeric, PositiveInside wall thickness of theditch structure

B10.2m

0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveLid depth on the insideC10.2 m

0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveDitch bottom bed depthD0.2 m

1.5 ftNumeric, positiveWidth of the (optional) in-side bench. Enter ZERO forno bench

Inside Bench Width0.5 m

4%Numeric, Grade typeCross grade of the (option-al) inside bench. It is mea-

Inside Bench Grade

sured away from the ditchstructure edge, and a posi-tive slope indicates risingbench from the ditch

1.0 ftNumericInside backslope link (op-tional) width. Enter ZEROvalue for no backslope link

F10.3 m

350 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 359: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

1:1Numeric, Slope typeSlope of the (optional) in-side backslope link. It is

G1

measured away from theditch structure, and a posi-tive slope indicates risinglink from the start point

0.45 ftNumeric, PositiveTop outside wall thicknessnear the lid

A20.15 m

0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveOutside wall thickness ofthe ditch structure

B20.2 m

0.45 ftNumeric, PositiveLid depth on the outsideC20.15 m

0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the hinge pointwhere the start of outside

E0 m

bench/backslope links is lo-cated

3.5ftOutside Bench WidthWidth of the (optional)outside bench. Enter ZEROfor no bench

Outside Bench Width1.1m

4%Outside Bench GradeCross grade of the (option-al) outside bench. It is mea-

Outside Bench Grade

sured away from the ditchstructure edge, and a posi-tive slope indicates risingbench from the ditch

0.3Numeric, PositiveOutside backslope link (op-tional) width. Enter ZEROvalue for no backslope link

F2

1 : 1Numeric, Slope typeSlope of the (optional) out-side backslope link. It is

G2

SideDitchWithLid | 351

Page 360: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

measured away from theditch structure, and a posi-tive slope indicates risinglink from the start point

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

The subassembly builds the shape for a ditch structure, as shown in the aboveillustration. To omit the daylight and bench links, enter a zero value for theappropriate width parameters.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Ditch_InP1

Ditch_BackP1, P4

Ditch_Lid_FaceP2, P3

L2 is defined by these two pointsLid_TopP15, P16

Ditch_Back_FillP21

352 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 361: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Ditch_OutP23

Top, DatumL18, L19, L20, L21

TopL1, L2, L3

DatumL4, L5, L6

Ditch structure shape areaDitchS1

Lid structure areaLidS2

Coding Diagram

SideDitchWithLid | 353

Page 362: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

SnapToMarkedPointThis subassembly is a general purpose subassembly to connect a link from theattachment point to a previously named marked point.

Unlike the LinkToMarkedPoint subassembly, with the SnapToMarkedPointsubassembly the previously named marked point can be on any subassemblygroup. The SnapToMarkedPoint subassembly can be used in a variety ofsituations, including connecting between adjacent roadways where the relativeoffsets and elevations vary, or across a gore area between converging roadways.Use the MarkPoint subassembly if the connecting point has not already beennamed.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The link may go in anydirection. The direction is determined by the location of the marked pointrelative to the attachment point.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringName of the marked point to connectto.

Marked Point Name

354 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 363: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

Top, DatumComma-sepa-rated string

A list of codes to be assigned to the link.Link Codes

True / FalseTrue to addthe end pointonly.

False to add the link, the start point, andthe end point.

Omit Link

False

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

TypeDescriptionParameter

Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the link.Begin Offset

NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation

Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset

NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation

Behavior

A link is added from the attachment point to the given marked point.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, the subassembly displays the link between the attachmentpoint and the marked point.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

None.

SnapToMarkedPoint | 355

Page 364: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

StrippingPavementThis subassembly is used to specify the existing top layer stripping to a specifieddepth.

356 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 365: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Optionally, this subassembly can extend the stripping back to the existingground with a specified backslope.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the daylight point on the finish grade.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.05mNumericSpecifies depth of the topsoil toremove.

Stripping Depth0.167ft

YesBooleanSpecifies to extend the strippingback to existing ground

Extend to Existing Ground

-2 (:1)NumericDefault foreslope of the strippingextension from original daylight

Foreslope

point to beginning of backslope.

2 (:1)Numeric, positiveBackslope to grade from bottomof stripping back into the exist-ing ground

Backslope

StrippingPavement | 357

Page 366: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the existing surface tograde back from bottom of stripping.

SurfaceExisting Surface

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the bottom of the strippinglayer below a specified surface. If the option to extend stripping to the existingground with a backslope is set to No, then stripping starts at the attachmentpoint directly on the specified surface, with a vertical link with depth valuespecified in the input parameters. From the bottom of this vertical link, aseries of links parallel to the specified surface are introduced inwards, untilthe baseline location of the assembly. If the option to extend stripping to theexisting ground is set to Yes, then at the attachment point, a link is introducedwith the specified foreslope, until the elevation difference between the bottomof this new link and the specified existing ground is equal to the “strippingdepth”. From this point, a series of links parallel to the specified surface areintroduced inwards, until the baseline location of the assembly. Additionally,another link outwardly is added to daylight to existing ground.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly inserts a horizontal line below theattachment point, towards the baseline location. This link is inserted fromthe attachment point at a depth equal to the “stripping depth”.

If the option to extend the stripping link to a surface is selected, then aforeslope link with a specified slope value to the stripping depth is insertedfirst, and then the horizontal link is added, as explained previously. Also, abackslope link is added outward, from the outside bottom of the strippinglink with a specified foreslope, and to the elevation equal to the subassemblyattachment point.

358 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 367: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Daylight point of stripping backslope linkDaylight_Strip (Only for Case 1)P3

Stripping foreslope link defining backfillForeslope_Stripping (Only for case 1)L1

Stripping linksStrippingL2, L3, L4… Ln

Coding Diagram

StrippingPavement | 359

Page 368: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StrippingTopSoilThis subassembly is used to specify stripping of top soil to a specified depth.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside of the stripping link.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft /Right/Right

Specifies the direction of stripping withrespect to attachment point.

Side

0.05mNumericSpecifies depth of the topsoil to remove.Stripping Depth0.167ft

5mNumericSpecifies width of the topsoil strippingregion.

Stripping Width16.67ft

-2 (:1)NumericDefault foreslope of the stripping exten-sion from original daylight point to be-ginning of back slope.

Foreslope

360 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 369: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

2 (:1)Numeric,positive

Backslope to grade from bottom ofstripping back into the existing ground

Backslope

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixedStripping Width and tie to an offsetalignment.

AlignmentStripping Width

RequiredName of the existing surface to gradeback from bottom of stripping.

SurfaceExisting Surface

Output Parameters

None.

Behavior

This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the bottom of the strippinglayer below a specified surface.

If the option to extend stripping to the existing ground with a backslopes isset to No, then stripping starts at the attachment point, directly on thespecified surface, with a vertical link that has the depth value specified in theinput parameters. From the bottom of this vertical link, a series of links parallelto the specified surface are introduced inwards, until baseline location of theassembly.

From the attachment point, a link is created with a specified foreslope. Thelink is drawn until the elevation difference between its lowest point and theexisting ground is equal to the “stripping depth”. Also, a backslope link isintroduced inwards, from the topsoil surface, from an offset defined by the“stripping width” parameter. Next a series of links parallel to the specifiedtopsoil surface are introduced, connecting above two new links to define thestripping layer.

StrippingTopSoil | 361

Page 370: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, foreslope and backslope links are added using the inputparameters. Connecting the bottom of these two links, a horizontal line isadded to represent the stripping layer.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Daylight point of stripping backslope linkDaylight_StripP2

Stripping linksStrippingAll Links

Coding Diagram

TrenchWithPipeThis subassembly creates a stone-filled drain structure with a circular pipeinside.

362 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 371: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point for this subassembly can be at the bottom center, thetop center, or the top corner of the drain structure.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassemblyis inserted towards.

Side

Top cornerString; (a) Top center; (b)Bottom center, (c) Topcorner

Specifies location of subassembly at-tachment point.

Attachment Point

1.0 ftNumeric, PositiveBottom Width of the trenchBottom Width0.3 m

TrenchWithPipe | 363

Page 372: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

1.5 ftNumeric, PositiveTop width of the trenchTop Width0.5 m

2.0 ftNumeric, PositiveTotal depth of the trenchDepth0.6 m

0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the pipe bedding over trenchbottom

Bedding Depth0.2 m

0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveDrain pipe diameterPipe Diameter0.2 ft

0.0 ftNumeric, PositiveThickness of the pipe material (option-al)

Pipe Thickness0.0 m

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalDepth of the trench can be optionally be over-ridden from a profile elevation. If the attachment

ProfileDepth

point is on the top of the trench, then this profileis assigned for the trench bottom and vice-versa.

Output Parameters

Behavior

The subassembly builds the shape for a simple drain structure as shown in theabove illustration.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.

364 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 373: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodesPoint/Link

Drain_BottomP1

Drain_Bottom_OutsideP2

Drain_Top_OutsideP3

Drain_Top_InsideP4

Drain_Bottom_InsideP5

Drain_CenterP6

Use existing point code, if any, among curband gutters.

Flow_LineP7

Top, Drain_TopL1

Datum, Drain_BottomL2, L3, L4

Trench_BackfillS1

Drain_AreaS2

TrenchWithPipe | 365

Page 374: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

TrenchPipe1This subassembly creates a flat-bottom trench with equal sideslopes and upto three layers of backfill material.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the Offset To Bottom distance above the midpointof the base of the trench.

366 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 375: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

2.0 mNumeric,positive

Width of the bottom of the trenchWidth6.0 ft

3 : 1Numeric,positive

X : 1 slope of the trench sideslopesSideslope

0.0Numeric,positive

Depth of the bedding layerBedding Depth

0.0Numeric,positive

Depth of the special backfill layerSpecial BackfillDepth

0.0Numeric,positive

The vertical offset down from the profile grade lineelevation to the bottom of the trench. For example,

Offset to Bottom

if the profile runs along the top of a circular pipe,the vertical offset is the pipe diameter plus the dis-tance from the bottom of the pipe to the bottomof the trench.

Behavior

The elevation of the bottom of the trench is calculated as the profile gradeline elevation minus the Offset To Bottom value. The horizontal trench bottomlink is placed symmetrically about the attachment point offset at that elevation,and the sideslopes are extended upward to the Existing Surface. The horizontalBedding link is placed at the given depth above the trench bottom. Thehorizontal Special Backfill link is placed at the given depth above the Beddinglink.

TrenchPipe1 | 367

Page 376: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredSurface model defining theexisting roadway surface

SurfaceExisting Surface

Output Parameters

None.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, the trench and existing surface are drawn as shown below.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Trench_BottomP1, P2

Trench_DaylightP3, P4

Trench_BeddingP5, P6

368 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 377: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Trench_BackfillP7, P8

Trench DatumL1 – L7

Trench_BottomL8

Trench_DaylightL9

Trench_BeddingS1

Trench_BackfillS2

Coding Diagram

UrbanCurbGutterGeneralThis subassembly inserts links for a standard shape concrete curb-and-gutterwith subbase.

User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.

UrbanCurbGutterGeneral | 369

Page 378: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of thecurb.

Input Parameters

Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

GutterEdge

BooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb and gutter aseither Gutter Edge or Back of Curb

Insertion Point

Outsidelane su-

BooleanSpecifies method of gutter slope input as: Use out-side lane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Usedepth of flow line from flange point.

Gutter SlopeMethod

pereleva-tion slope

- 2%NumericSpecifies fixed gutter slopeGutter Slope

0.450 mNumeric,positive

Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero ifthere is no subbase.

Subbase Depth1.5 ft

370 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 379: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.3 mNumeric,positive

Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at theback-of-curb.

Subbase Exten-sion 1.0 ft

Use superel-evation

Selection listSelects whether to use the Outside Lane supereleva-tion slope for the subbase layer, or to set a numeric% slope value

Use SE

-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SE isset to True.

Subbase %Slope

175 mmNumeric,positive,

Depth of the gutter at the flange pointDimension A(mm/in) 7 in

non-zero

400 mmWidth from the flange point to the gutter flowlineDimension B16 in(mm/in)

25 mmNumeric,positive,

Depth from the flange point to the gutter flowlineDimension C(mm/in) 1 in

non-zero

150 mmNumeric,positive,

Height of curb from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb

Dimension D(mm/in) 6 in

non-zero

200 mmNumeric,positive,

Width from the gutter flowline to the back-of-curbDimension E(mm/in) 8 in

non-zero

150 mmNumeric,positive,

Width of the top-of-curbDimension F(mm/in) 6 in

non-zero

325 mmNumeric,positive,

Height of the back-of-curbDimension G(mm/in) 13 in

non-zero

UrbanCurbGutterGeneral | 371

Page 380: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Behavior

The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensionsDimension A – Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values.If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the backof curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layercloses to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram.

The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the backof the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter componentbased on the input parameters given. If the Use SE parameter is set to true,the subbase layer is inserted at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1

Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2

Top-of-curbTopCurbP3

Back-of-curbBackCurbP4

Finish grade on the curb and gutterTop,L1 – L3Curb

372 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 381: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

SubbaseL7Datum

Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1

SubbaseS2

Coding Diagram

UrbanCurbGutterValley1This subassembly inserts links for a flat-bottomed valley curb and gutter withsubbase.

User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.

UrbanCurbGutterValley1 | 373

Page 382: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of thecurb.

Input Parameters

Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

Gutter EdgeBooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb and gutter aseither Gutter Edge or Back of Curb

Insertion Point

Outside lanesupereleva-tion slope

BooleanSpecifies method of gutter slope input as: Useoutside lane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Usedepth of flow line from flange point.

Gutter SlopeMethod

- 2%NumericSpecifies fixed gutter slopeGutter Slope

0.450 mNumeric, posi-tive

Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero ifthere is no subbase.

Subbase Depth1.5 ft

0.3 mNumeric, posi-tive

Distance the subbase is extended beyond theback-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbaseat the back-of-curb

Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft

374 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 383: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

TrueTrue/FalseTrue uses the outside lane superelevation slopefor the subbase layer.

Use SE

False specifies a numeric %slope.

-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SEis set to True.

Subbase %Slope

175 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Depth of the gutter at the flange pointDimension A7 in

non-zero

375 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Width from the gutter flange point to the gutterflowline

Dimension B15 in

non-zero

25 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Depth from the gutter flange point to the gutterflowline

Dimension C1 in

non-zero

75 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Height from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curbDimension D3 in

non-zero

225 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Width from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curbDimension E9 in

non-zero

250 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Height of the back-of-curbDimension F9 in

non-zero

Behavior

The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensionsDimension A – Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values.If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the backof curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layercloses to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram.

UrbanCurbGutterValley1 | 375

Page 384: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the backof the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter componentbased on the input parameters given. If the Use SE parameter is set to true,the subbase layer is inserted at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1

Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2

Top-of-curbTopCurbP3BackCurb

Finish grade on the curb and gutterTop,L1, L2Curb

SubbaseL6Datum

Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1

SubbaseS2

376 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 385: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

UrbanCurbGutterValley2This subassembly inserts links for a slope-bottomed valley curb and gutterwith subbase.

User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of thecurb.

UrbanCurbGutterValley2 | 377

Page 386: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

GutterEdge

BooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb and gutter as eitherGutter Edge or Back of Curb

Insertion Point

Outsidelane su-

BooleanSpecifies method of gutter slope input as: Use outside lanesuperelevation slope; Fixed slope; Use depth of flow linefrom flange point.

Gutter SlopeMethod

pereleva-tion slope

- 2%NumericSpecifies fixed gutter slopeGutter Slope

0.450 mNumeric,positive

Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there isno subbase.

SubbaseDepth 1.5 ft

0.3 mNumeric,positive

Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb.Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-of-curb.

Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft

TrueTrue/FalseTrue uses the outside lane superelevation slope for thesubbase layer.

Use SE

False specifies a numeric %slope.

-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SE is set toTrue.

Subbase%Slope

150 mmNumeric,positive,

Depth of the gutter at the flange pointDimension A6 in

non-zero

610 mmNumeric,positive,

Width from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowlineDimension B24 in

non-zero

378 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 387: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

100 mmNumeric,positive,

Depth from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline,and from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb

Dimension C4 in

non-zero

225 mmNumeric,positive,

Width from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curbDimension D9 in

non-zero

75 mmNumeric,positive,

Width from the top-of-curb to back-of-curbDimension E3 in

non-zero

300 mmNumeric,positive,

Height of the back-of-curbDimension F12 in

non-zero

Behavior

The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensionsDimension A – Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values.If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the backof curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layercloses to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram.

The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the backof the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

Output Parameters

None.

UrbanCurbGutterValley2 | 379

Page 388: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter componentbased on the input parameters given. If the Use SE parameter is set to true,the subbase layer is inserted at a slope of -2%.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1

Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2

Top-of-curbTopCurbP3

Back-of-curbBackCurbP4

Finish grade on the curb and gutterTop,L1 – L3Curb

SubbaseL7Datum

Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1

SubbaseS2

380 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 389: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

UrbanCurbGutterValley3This subassembly inserts links for a slope-bottomed valley curb and gutterwith subbase.

The bottom surface of the curve flattens to a horizontal link at the gutterflowline. User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of thecurb.

UrbanCurbGutterValley3 | 381

Page 390: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

GutterEdge

BooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb and gutter as eitherGutter Edge or Back of Curb

Insertion Point

Outsidelane su-

BooleanSpecifies method of gutter slope input as: Use outsidelane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Use depth of flowline from flange point.

Gutter SlopeMethod

pereleva-tion slope

- 2%NumericSpecifies fixed gutter slopeGutter Slope

0.450 mNumeric,positive

Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there isno subbase.

Subbase Depth1.5 ft

0.3 mNumeric,positive

Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-of-curb.

Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft

-2 (%)Numeric orstring

% slope of the subbase layer. The slope can be a numericvalue, or can use the following codes to match pre-de-

Subbase%Slope

fined superelevation specifications of the baseline align-ment:LI – inside lane slopeLO – outside lane slopeSI – inside shoulder slopeSO – outside shoulder slope

150 mmNumeric,positive,

Depth of the gutter at the flange pointDimension A6 in

non-zero

382 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 391: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

600 mmNumeric,positive,

Width from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowlineDimension B24 in

non-zero

50 mmNumeric,positive,

Depth from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline,and from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb

Dimension C2 in

non-zero

40 mmNumeric,positive,

Width from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curbDimension D1.5 in

non-zero

150 mmNumeric,positive,

Width from the top-of-curb to back-of-curbDimension E6 in

non-zero

300 mmNumeric,positive,

Height of the back-of-curbDimension F12 in

non-zero

Behavior

The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter valuesfor Dimension A – Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zerovalues. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted tothe back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbaselayer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram.

The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the backof the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.

Runtime Logical Assignments

None.

UrbanCurbGutterValley3 | 383

Page 392: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter componentbased on the input parameters given. If a numeric value is given for the Subbase%Slope, the subbase layer is inserted at the given slope value. Otherwise thedefault value of -2% is used.

Output Parameters

None.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1

Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2

Top-of-curbTopCurbP3

Back-of-curbBackCurbP4

Finish grade on the curb and gutterTop,L1 – L3Curb

SubbaseL8Datum

Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1

SubbaseS2

384 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 393: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1This subassembly is used to replace an existing curb and gutter, with the sodstrip tying to the existing inside edge of sidewalk. The vertical placement ofcurb and gutter is determined by allowable milling and/or overlay at the flangepoints and by allowable ranges of slopes for sod strip.

To apply this subassembly, flange point information (alignment or offsetvalue) is essential.

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 385

Page 394: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Attachment

The attachment point is outside/highside point of the sod strip edge of thesidewalk. Though notionally this attachment point is to mark the highsideof the sodstrip, actual location of sod strip high point could vary from this asthe user attaches an appropriate marked point or alignment and profile.Therefore, this attachment point is more of layout time assistance rather thandesign point control.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run over rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slopewith a "%" sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightIndicates the position of the curb and gutter withrespect to the attachment point.

Side

3.6 mNumericPoint defining the offset of the face of the flangeof the gutter. This offset is as neasured from thebaseline point.

Flange Point Off-set from CL 10 ft

NoneStringThis inside sidewalk point will be used as the highpoint of sod strip. (OPTIONAL)

Sidewalk Point

386 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 395: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

0.05 mNumeric, posi-tive

Maximum allowable depth of the flange pointbelow the edge of existing pavement.

Max Milling2.5 in

0.08m3.5 in

Numeric, posi-tive

Desirable difference in elevation from the edge ofexisting pavement to the flange point. A positive

Desirable Lift

value is for the flange point being above the exist-ing pavement.

0.02Minimum allowable slope from the back of curbto the sidewalk point.

Min Sod Slope

0.06Maximum allowable slope from the back of curbto the sidewalk point.

Max Sod Slope

NoneStringMark Flange Point - name of a marked point tobe stored at the flange point - for later rehabsubassemblies.

Mark InsidePoint

The following are the same parameters as Cur-bAndGutterGeneral subassembly.

0.450 mNumeric, posi-tive

Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero ifthere is no subbase.

Subbase Depth1.5 ft

0.3 mNumeric, posi-tive

Distance the subbase is extended beyond theback-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbaseat the back-of-curb.

Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft

-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SEis set to True.

Subbase %Slope

150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Depth of the gutter at the flange point.Dimension A(mm/in) 6 in

non-zero

400 mmWidth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.Dimension B16 in(mm/in)

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 387

Page 396: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

25 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Depth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.Dimension C(mm/in) 1 in

non-zero

150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Height of curb from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb.

Dimension D(mm/in) 6 in

non-zero

200 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Width from the gutter flowline to the back-of-curb.Dimension E(mm/in) 8 in

non-zero

150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Width of the top-of-curb.Dimension F(mm/in) 6 in

non-zero

325 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Height of the back-of-curb.Dimension G(mm/in) 13 in

non-zero

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalThis will set the offset value for the highsidepoint for sod strip.

AlignmentInside Edge of Sidewalk

OptionalThis will establish the offset value of flangepoint to start the subassembly.

AlignmentFlange Point

OptionalThis will set the offset value for the highsidepoint for sod strip.

ProfileLeft Gutter Profile

RequiredName of the existing surface, used to deter-mine the edge of pavement elevation at the

SurfaceEGTopSurf

flange point, and is also used to determine

388 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 397: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

the elevation of the Sidewalk Point if given asan offset or alignment; but profiles not set.

If marked points are provided, runtime logical assignments are unnecessaryand will be ignored even if set. If marked points are not set and offsets oralignments are used to locate points, it is expected to set profiles throughlogical assignment. If they are not, this subassembly takes its elevation fromsurface set in above logical name mapping.

Output Parameters

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NumericCross slope of designed sod stripSod Strip Slope

Numeric, posi-tive

Gutter slope in the new curb and gutter subassem-bly

Gutter Slope

Behavior

This subassembly is used to place a new curb and gutter parametrically, andcan optionally tie (with a sod strip) into either the inside edge of the existingsidewalk, or to a new sidewalk created with another subasembly. The horizontalplacement of the curb and gutter is determined from the previously knownflange point location. Highside of the sod strip can be located either by a fixedoffset or any other marked point, such as the inside edge of sidewalk.Alternatively, this point can come from logical assignment of an aligmentand profile. Newly designed flange point, optionally marked so that it can beused as input later for replacement lane subassemblies.

Key steps in completing this conditional subassembly are as follows:

1 Get existing pavement elevation at the flange point offset.

2 Set flange point elevation based on the minimum lift value.

3 Next insert curb and gutter points from P to P4 using the input parameters(similar to CurbAndGutterGeneral).

4 If the inside sidewalk marked point is assigned, establish that point asP10. If marked point is not associated, look for logical assignements for

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 389

Page 398: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

'inside edge of sidewalk" alignment. If yes, then get profile elevation orfrom the surface logical name mapping.

5 If none of the above data is available for the highside of the sod strip,use the offset as dictated by attachment point to establish point P10.

6 Find the slope between P4 and P10.

7 Check whether that slope is within the parameters of Min/Max sod stripslopes.

8 If it is lower than minimum, set the slope to minimum allowable andcomputed points P4 to P1 backwards. Similarly, if the slope is more thanmaximum allowable sod strip slopes, set it to maximum allowable andcalculate P4 to P1.

9 Check whether the elevation difference between P1 and P11 is withintolerable limits of max milling. If P is below P11 and difference is morethan max milling, then abort, resulting in an error displayed in the eventviewer.

All other curb and gutter links are inserted, based on the Input Parameterdimensions Dimension A - Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive,non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer isinserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width.The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb as shown in the diagram.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode , this subassembly is set based on the attachment point andthe default flange point offset from baseline. The width of the sod strip iscomputed by subtracting the curb and gutter total widt from "flange point toattacment point" distance. The minimum allowable sod strip slope is used tocalculate the back of curb point from which the rest of the curb and gutter isdrawn, using the input parameters given.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1

Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2

390 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 399: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Top-of-curbTopCurbP3

Back-of-curbBackCurbP4

All curb linksCurbL1–L6

Finish grade on the curb and gutterTopL1–L3

SubbaseL7Datum

DatumL4, L8, L9

Top, Datum, SodL11

Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1

SubbaseS2

Coding Diagram

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 391

Page 400: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2This subassembly is used to replace an existing curb and gutter, with the sodstrip tying to the existing inside edge of sidewalk. The vertical placement ofthe curb and gutter is controlled by a design profile of the back of curb.

To apply this subassembly, flange point information (alignment or offsetvalue) is essential.

Attachment

The attachment point is outside/highside point of the sod strip edge of thesidewalk. Though notionally this attachment point is to mark the highsideof the sodstrip, actual location of sod strip high point could vary from this asthe user attaches an appropriate marked point or alignment and profile.Therefore, this attachment point is more of layout time assistance rather thandesign point control.

392 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 401: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run over rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slopewith a "%" sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightIndicates the position of the curb and gutter withrespect to the attachment point.

Side

3.6 mNumericPoint defining the offset of the face of the flangeof the gutter. This offset is as measured from the

Flange Point Off-set from CL 10 ft

baseline of the assembly (or corridor in corridorstate).

NoneStringThis inside sidewalk point will be used as the highpoint of sod strip. (OPTIONAL)

Sidewalk Point

NoneStringMark Flange Point - name of a marked point tobe stored at the flange point - for later rehabsubassemblies.

Mark InsidePoint

The following are the same parameters as Cur-bAndGutterGeneral subassembly.

0.450 mNumeric, posi-tive

Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero ifthere is no subbase.

Subbase Depth1.5 ft

0.3 mNumeric, posi-tive

Distance the subbase is extended beyond theback-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbaseat the back-of-curb.

Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft

-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SEis set to True.

Subbase %Slope

175 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Depth of the gutter at the flange point.Dimension A(mm/in) 7 in

non-zero

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 | 393

Page 402: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

400 mmWidth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.Dimension B16 in(mm/in)

25 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Depth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.Dimension C(mm/in) 1 in

non-zero

150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Height of curb from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb.

Dimension D(mm/in) 6 in

non-zero

200 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Width from the gutter flowline to the back-of-curb.Dimension E(mm/in) 8 in

non-zero

150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Width of the top-of-curb.Dimension F(mm/in) 6 in

non-zero

325 mmNumeric, posi-tive,

Height of the back-of-curb.Dimension G(mm/in) 13 in

non-zero

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalThis will set offset value for the highside pointfor sod strip.

AlignmentInside Edge of Sidewalk

OptionalThis will establish offfest of flange point tostart the subassembly.

AlignmentFlange Point

RequiredThis helps position curb and gutter.ProfileBack of Curb Profile

OptionalThis will set offset value for the highside pointfor sod strip.

ProfileInside Edge of Sidewalk

394 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 403: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

RequiredName of the existing surface, used to deter-mine the edge of pavement elevation at the

SurfaceEGTopSurf

flange point, and is also used to determinethe elevation of the Sidewalk Point if given asan offset or alignment; but profiles not set.

If marked points are provided, runtime logical assignments are unnecessaryand will be ignored even if set. If marked points are not set and offsets oralignments are used to locate points, it is expected to set profiles throughlogical assignment. If they are not, this subassembly takes elevation fromsurface set in above logical name mapping.

If Back of Curb profile is not assigned in corridor definition, then thesubassembly aborts with an error message in event viewer.

Output Parameters

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NumericCross slope of designed sod stripSod Strip Slope

Numeric, posi-tive

Gutter slope in the new curb and gutter subassem-bly

Gutter Slope

Behavior

This subassembly is used to place a new curb and gutter parametrically, andcan optionally tie (with a sod strip) into either the inside edge of the existingsidewalk, or to a new sidewalk created with another subasembly. The horizontalplacement of the curb and gutter is determined from the previously knowflange point location. Highside of the sod strip can be located either by a fixedoffset or any other marked point, such as inside edge of sidewalk. Alternativelythis point can come from logical assignment of an aligment and profile. Newlydesigned flange point, optionally marked so that it can be used as input laterfor replacement lane subassemblies.

Key steps in completing this conditional subassembly are as follows:

1 From flange point offset and the input parameters locate the offset of“back of curb”.

UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 | 395

Page 404: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

2 From the logical assignment, get the "back of curb" elevation at thatstation and establish this point P4.

3 From this point establish all curb and gutter points and links using theinput parameters (similar to UrbanCurbGutterGeneral1

4 If inside sidewalk marked point is assigned, establish that point as P10.If marked point is not associated, look for logical assignments for 'insideedge of sidewalk" alignment. If yes then get profile elevation or from thesurface logical name mapping.

5 If none of the above data is available for the highside of the sod strip,use the offset as dictated by attachment point to establish point P10.

All other curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameterdimensions Dimension A - Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive,non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer isinserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width.The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb as shown in the diagram.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode the subassembly is set based on the attachment point and thedefault flange point offset from baseline. Width of the sod strip is computedby subtracting the curb and gutter total width from "flange point to attachmentpoint" distance. Use 2% slope to calculate the low side of sod strip (or back ofcurb point), from which the rest of curb and gutter is drawn using the inputparameters given.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1

Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2

Top-of-curbTopCurbP3

Back-of-curbBackCurbP4

All curb linksCurbL1–L6

396 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 405: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Finish grade on the curb and gutterTopL1–L3

SubbaseL7Datum

DatumL4, L8, L9

Top, Datum, SodL11

Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1

SubbaseS2

Coding Diagram

UrbanReplaceSidewalkThis subassembly is used to replace an existing sidewalk, starting at the existingoutside edge of sidewalk and inserting surfaces towards the curb.

To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theexisting outside edge of sidewalk information. Elevations at this point couldcome from a surface or a profile. Furthermore, if the component defining this

UrbanReplaceSidewalk | 397

Page 406: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

edge is also another rehab component, then they could be passed in as markedpoints, thus transferring offset and elevation information.

Attachment

The attachment point is (near) the outside edge of the sidewalk. For betterresults, insert this on a controlling offset (with fixed offset) marker pointduring assembly construction.

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightIndicates the inward direction of the sidewalk.Side

NoneStringTo define outside edge of sidewalk and elevationto start the subassembly (OPTIONAL)

Outside SidewalkMarked Point

1.5mNumericWidth of the sidewalk, measuring inwards fromhigh edge of sidewalk point

Width5.0ft

-2%NumericCross slope of sidewalk in %, measuring inwardsfrom high edge of sidewalk

% Slope

Numeric,positive

Depth or thickness of the sidewalkDepth

398 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 407: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

NoneStringName of the marked point to be stored at the newlow edge of sidewalk (OPTIONAL)

Mark Inside Point

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusDescriptionTypeParameter

OptionalThis will set the outside edge of proposedsidewalk as start point

AlignmentOutside Edge of Side-walk

OptionalThis will set the outside edge elevation valueof proposed sidewalk

ProfileLeft Gutter Profile

RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-

SurfaceEGTopSurf

vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value

Output Parameters

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

-2%NumericCross slope of sidewalk in %, measuring inwardsfrom high edge of sidewalk

% Slope

Numeric,positive

Depth or thickness of the sidewalkDepth

Behavior

By default outside edge of sidewalk is located at the attached marked point orat the associated alignment. Similraly elevation is set based on marker pointassociated, or profile or from the surface at that offset.

Once this start point is established,sidewalk structure links are inserted inwardsfrom this point for given width, slope, and depth. If a name is given for MarkInside Point, a marked point is stored at the new low edge of sidwalk.

UrbanReplaceSidewalk | 399

Page 408: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly starts at the attached point and draws asingle shape with given dimensions, such as width, slope and depth.

NOTE While constructing an assembly, it is recommended that this subassemblybe added at a controlling offset, if there is no previously marked point. Thiscontrolling offset could be at a decent offset from the baseline marker, so that thelayout mode looks like a typical section. However, it is recommended that the userdoesn't have to map this controlling offset to any "alignment/profile" in the corridorstate, as that would cause problems such as making the design not perpendicularto the baseline in some cases. Not associating this controlling offset will not haveany effect on the corridor, as the start point is attached to an alignment/markedpoint through the subassembly macro for an exact location.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Inside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_InP1

Outside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_OutP2

Top SidewalkL1

DatumL2

Sidewalk concrete areaSidewalkS1

400 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 409: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Coding Diagram

UrbanSidewalkThis subassembly inserts links for a concrete sidewalk with inside and outsidegrass boulevards.

Attachment

The attachment point is at the inside edge of the inside boulevard. TheUrbanSidewalk subassembly is typically attached to a back-of-curb or edge ofpavement.

UrbanSidewalk | 401

Page 410: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Input Parameters

Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.

DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter

RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide

0.0Numeric,positive

Width of the inside grass boulevardInside BoulevardWidth

1.5 mNumeric,positive,

Width of the concrete sidewalkSidewalk Width5.0 ft

non-zero

0.0Numeric,positive

Width of the outside grass boulevardOutside Boule-vard Width

2 (%)Numeric% slope of the sidewalk and grass strips. Positiveslopes are upwards from the attachment point.

%Slope

0.100 mNumeric,positive

Depth of concrete for the sidewalkDepth0.333 ft

Behavior

The inside grass strip, sidewalk, and outside grass boulevard links are insertedoutward from the attachment point at the given slope. The grass strips canbe omitted by specifying a zero-width.

Optionally, various element widths can be attained by attaching to offsetalignments. Also, the sidewalk cross slope can be derived by tying into anoffset profile.

402 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 411: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Runtime Logical Assignments

StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Inside BoulevardWidth and tie the inside edge-of-sidewalk to anoffset alignment

AlignmentInside BoulevardWidth

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Width of Side-walk and tie the outside edge-of-sidwalk to anoffset alignment

AlignmentSidewalk Width

OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Outside Boule-vard Width with an offset alignment

AlignmentOutside BoulevardWidth

Output Parameters

None.

Layout Mode Operation

In layout mode, this subassembly displays the boulevards and sidewalk basedon the input parameter values given.

Point, Link, and Shape Codes

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Inside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_InP2

Outside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_OutP3

TopL1Datum

TopL2Sidewalk

TopL3

UrbanSidewalk | 403

Page 412: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

DescriptionCodePoint / Link

Datum

SidewalkL4 – L6Datum

Sidewalk concrete areaSidewalkS1

Coding Diagram

404 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)

Page 413: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

Index

S

subassemblies 3, 5, 8, 11–12, 14, 18, 20, 26, 28, 33, 38, 43, 48, 54, 59, 72, 77, 82, 87, 92, 97, 108, 111, 115, 119, 124, 131, 138, 143, 148, 154, 157, 165, 167, 169, 172, 174, 177, 179, 181, 184, 186, 188, 191, 193, 196, 203, 210, 216, 218, 221, 227, 234, 239, 246, 251, 259, 269, 273, 278, 284, 293, 297, 302, 307, 312, 316, 321, 325, 330, 336, 341, 344, 348, 354, 356, 360, 362, 366, 369, 373, 377, 381, 385, 392, 397, 401

BasicBarrier 3BasicCurb 5BasicCurbAndGutter 8BasicGuardrail 11BasicLane 12BasicLaneTransition 14BasicShoulder 18BasicSideSlopeCutDitch 20BasicSideWalk 26BridgeBoxGirder1 28BridgeBoxGirder2 33Channel 38ChannelParabolicBottom 43DaylightBasin 48DaylightBench 54DaylightGeneral 59DaylightMaxOffset 72DaylightMaxWidth 77DaylightMinOffset 82DaylightMinWidth 87DaylightMultiIntercept 92DaylightStandard 97DaylightToOffset 108DaylightToROW 111GenericPavementStructure 115introduction 3

LaneBrokenBack 119LaneFromTaperedMedian1 124LaneFromTaperedMedian2 131LaneInsideSuper 119, 138LaneOutsideSuper 143LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening148LaneParabolic 154LaneTowardCrown 157LinkMulti 165LinkOffsetAndElevation 167LinkOffsetAndSlope 169LinkOffsetOnSurface 172LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection 174LinkSlopesBetweenPoints 177LinkSlopeToElevation 179LinkSlopeToSurface 181LinkToMarkedPoint 184LinkVertical 186LinkWidthAndSlope 188MarkPoint 191MedianDepressed 193MedianDepressedShoulderExt 196MedianDepressedShoulderVert 203MedianFlushWithBarrier 210MedianRaisedConstantSlope 216MedianRaisedWithCrown 218OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges221,

227OverlayCrownBetweenEdges 234OverlayMedianAsymmetrical 239OverlayMedianSymmetrical 246OverlayMillAndLevel1 251OverlayMillAndLevel2 259OverlayParabolic 269OverlayWidenMatchSlope 273OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 278OverlayWidenWithSuper 284RailSingle 293RetainWallTapered 297RetainWallTaperedWide 302RetainWallTieToDitch 307RetainWallToLowSide 312

405 | Index

Page 414: C3DStockSubassemblyHelp

RetainWallVertical 316ShapeTrapezoidal 321ShoulderExtendAll 325ShoulderExtendSubbase 330ShoulderVerticalSubbase 336SideDitch 341SideDitchUShape 344SideDitchWithLid 348SnapToMarkedPoint 354StrippingPavement 356StrippingTopSoil 360

TrenchPipe1 366TrenchWithPipe 362UrbanCurbGutterGeneral 369UrbanCurbGutterValley1 373UrbanCurbGutterValley2 377UrbanCurbGutterValley3 381UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 385UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 392UrbanReplaceSidewalk 397UrbanSidewalk 401

406 | Index